Schneider Electric TSX 57/PCX 57 Processors, Implementation User Guide

Modicon Premium PLCs
using PL7 Software
TSX 57/PCX 57 Processors
Implementation Manual Volume 1
35011052.06
07/2008 eng
www.schneider-electric.com
2
35011052.06 07/2008
Document Set
Document Set
At a Glance
This documentation is made up of 5 Volumes:
Volume 1
z Racks/Supplies/Processors
z Implementation/Diagnostics/Maintenance
z Standards and operating conditions
z Process supply
z Volume 2
z Discrete interfaces
z Safety
z Volume 3
z Counting
z Movement commands
z Volume 4
z Communication
z Network and bus interfaces
z Volume 5
z Analog
z Weighing
z
35011052.06 07/2008
3
Document Set
4
35011052.06 07/2008
Table of Contents
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
About the Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Part I Premium and Atrium PLC stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Chapter 1
Introduction to Premium and Atrium PLC stations . . . . . . . . . 19
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
TSX P57 PLC station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
PCX 57 PLC station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Chapter 2
General introduction to the components of a PLC station. . . 23
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
General Introduction to TSX P57 Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
General introduction to PCX 57 processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
General introduction to TSX RKY racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
General introduction to TSX PSY power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
General introduction to Process and AS-i TSX SUP and TSX 1021/1051 power
supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
General introduction to the TSX REY bus X extension module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
General introduction to TSX DEY/DSY/DMY input/output modules . . . . . . . . . . 32
General introduction to TSX CTY/CCY counting modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Introduction to TSX CAY axis control modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
General introduction to TSX CFY step by step control modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
General introduction to TSX SCY/ETY communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
General introduction to the AS-i bus interface module: TSX SAY. . . . . . . . . . . . 43
General introduction to the TSX ISPY weighing module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
General introduction to the TSX FAN ventilation module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
General introduction to the TSX PAY emergency stop monitoring module. . . . . 46
Chapter 3
General introduction to the different configurations of a
PLC station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Different types of Premium PLC Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Different types of PLC stations with Atrium processors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
35011052.06 07/2008
5
Chapter 4
Operating Standards and Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Standards and Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Operating conditions and environmental conditions to be avoided . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Premium PLC protection processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Part II TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks . . . . . . . . . . . 65
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Chapter 5
Introduction to TSX RKY .. standard/extendable racks.. . . . . 67
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Standard and extendable TSX RKY racks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Standard rack: description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Extendable rack: description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Chapter 6
TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks : installation/
mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Installing Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
mounting and fixing racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Connection of the ground to a TSX RKY rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Chapter 7
TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks: functions . . . . . . 85
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Building a PLC station with Premium processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Building a PLC station with Atrium processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
PLC station rack addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
The principle of addressing two racks at the same address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Module addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Installing power supplies, processors and other modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Chapter 8
TSX RKY Racks: accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
TSX CBY..0K bus X extension cable (II ≥ 02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
TSX CBY 1000 bus X extension cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Line terminator TSX TLYEX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Positioning of line terminators on a station using a Premium processor . . . . . . 106
Positioning of line termination on a station using a Atrium processor . . . . . . . . 107
TSX RKA 02 protective cover for unoccupied positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Compatibility with the Installed Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Chapter 9
Ventilation module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Ventilation module: general introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Ventilation module: physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
6
35011052.06 07/2008
Ventilation module: dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Ventilation module: mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Rules for installing racks fitted with ventilation modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Ventilation Module: Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Ventilation module: characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Chapter 10
X-Bus extension module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Bus X extension module: introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Rack Extender Module: physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Bus X extension module: installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Bus X extension module: configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Bus X extension module: maximum distances according to module type. . . . . 134
Bus X extension modules: connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Bus X extension module: diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Topology of a PLC station with extension module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Managing a power supply module fitted with an bus X extension module . . . . 144
Part III TSX P57/TSX H57 Premium processors. . . . . . . . . . . . 145
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Chapter 11
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
General Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Physical Description of TSX P57 Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Real-time clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Chapter 12
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Positioning of the processor module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
How to mount processor modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Mounting/Removing a PCMCIA Memory Extension Card on a TSX P57
Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Processing on Insertion/Extraction of a PCMCIA Memory Card on a
Premium PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Standard and Backup Memory Cards for PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Application + Files Type Memory Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
File Type Memory Card: TSX MRP F 004M Replaces Card
TSX MRP DS 2048 P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Correspondence Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Chapter 13
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Precautions to be taken when replacing a TSX P57/TSX H57 processor. . . . . 181
Changing the RAM memory backup battery on TSX P57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
35011052.06 07/2008
7
Changing the Battery of a RAM Memory PCMCIA Card on the TSX P57 . . . . . 185
Changing the Battery of a TSX MRP DS 2048 P RAM Memory Card . . . . . . . . 187
Changing the Batteries of a PCMCIA Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Battery Lifetimes for the PCMCIA Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
What happens after you press the processor RESET button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Finding errors using processor state LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Non blocking errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Blocking errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Processor or system errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Chapter 14
TSX P57 103 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
General characteristics of TSX P 57 103 processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Chapter 15
TSX P57 153 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
General characteristics of TSX P57 153 processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Chapter 16
TSX P57 203 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
General characteristics of TSX P57 203 processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Chapter 17
TSX P57 253 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
General characteristics of TSX P57 253 processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Chapter 18
TSX P57 2623 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
TSX P57 2623 Processors: General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Chapter 19
TSX P57 2823 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
TSX P57 2823 Processors: General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Chapter 20
TSX P57 303 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
General characteristics of TSX P57 303 processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Chapter 21
TSX P57 303A processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
General characteristics of TSX P57 303A processors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Chapter 22
TSX P57 353 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
General characteristics of TSX P57 353 processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Chapter 23
TSX P57 353A processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
General characteristics of TSX P57 353A processors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Chapter 24
TSX P57 353LA Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
General Characteristics of TSX P57 353LA Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Chapter 25
TSX P57 3623 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
TSX P57 3623 Processors: General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Chapter 26
TSX P57 3623A processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
TSX P57 3623A Processors: General Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
8
35011052.06 07/2008
Chapter 27
TSX P57 453 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
General characteristics of TSX P57 453 processors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Chapter 28
TSX P57 453A processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
General characteristics of TSX P57 453A processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Chapter 29
TSX P57 4823 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
TSX P57 4823 Processors: General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Chapter 30
TSX P57 4823A processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
TSX P57 4823A Processors: General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Chapter 31
Premium TSX P57/TSX H57 processor: general
characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Electrical Characteristics of TSX P57 Processors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Configuration of Premium PL7 Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Devices which can be connected to or built into the processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Defining and counting application-specific channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Chapter 32
Processor performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
MAST task cycle time: introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
MAST Task Cycle Time: Program Processing Ppt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
MAST Task Cycle Time: Input/Output Internal Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Example of the calculation of cycle times of a MAST task under the
following conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
FAST Task Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Event Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Part IV Atrium PCX 57 processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Chapter 33
PCX 57 Processors: introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
General introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Physical description of PCX 57 processors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Real-time clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Dimensions of PCX 57 processor cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
The different components of a PCX 57 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Chapter 34
PCX 57 Processors: installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Precautions to be taken during installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Physical installation of the PCX 57 processor in the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Logical installation of the PCX 57 processor on the bus X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Operations to be carried out before installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
35011052.06 07/2008
9
How to configure the PCX 57 processor address on the bus X. . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
How to configure the processor’s standard I/O address on the ISA bus . . . . . . 304
How to install the PCX 57 processor card in the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Integrating a PCX 57 processor into an bus X section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
How to install/remove the memory extension card on the PCX 57
processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Processing on insertion/extraction of a PCMCIA memory card on a
PCX 57 PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Memory cards for PCX 57 processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Precautions to be taken when replacing a PCX 57 processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Chapter 35
PCX 57 processors: Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Description of PCX 57 processor LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Changing the PCX 57 RAM memory backup battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Changing the PCX 57 RAM memory PCMCIA card battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
What happens after you press the processor RESET button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
How the PCX 57 behaves after an action on the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Finding errors via the processor status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Chapter 36
PCX 57 203 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
General characteristics of the PCX 57 203 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Chapter 37
PCX 57 353 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
General characteristics of the PCX 57 353 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Chapter 38
Atrium PCX 57 CPU: general characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Electrical characteristics of PCX 57 processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Characteristics of Atrium PL7 processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Devices which can be connected to or built into the processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Defining and Counting Application-specific channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Processor performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Part V TSX PSY supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Chapter 39
TSX PSY… supply modules: introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
General introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Supply modules: description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Chapter 40
TSX PSY … supply modules: installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Installation/mounting TSX PSY … supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Rules for connecting TSX PSY supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Connecting alternating current power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
10
35011052.06 07/2008
Connecting direct current power supply modules from a floating 24 or
48 VDC direct current network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Connecting direct current power supply modules from an alternating
current network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Sensor and pre-actuator power supply servo control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Definition of protection devices at the start of a line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Chapter 41
TSX PSY … supply modules: diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Display on TSX PSY supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Back-up battery on TSX PSY ... power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Loss of power to rack other than rack 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
What happens after pressing the RESET button on a power supply module . . 373
Chapter 42
TSX PSY … supply modules : auxiliary functions. . . . . . . . . 375
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Alarm relay on TSX PSY supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Characteristics of the alarm relay contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Chapter 43
TSX PSY power supply modules: breakdown of power
consumption and power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Breakdown of power consumption for selection of the power supply module . 382
Processor consumption breakdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
I/O module consumption breakdown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Consumption breakdown of analog/counting/movement control modules . . . . 387
Consumption breakdown of communication modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Consumption breakdown (other modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Chapter 44
TSX PSY 2600 power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Characteristics of the TSX PSY 2600 power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Chapter 45
TSX PSY 5500 power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Characteristics of the TSX PSY 5500 power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Chapter 46
TSX PSY 8500 power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Characteristics of the TSX PSY 8500 power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Chapter 47
TSX PSY 1610 power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Characteristics of the TSX PSY 1610 power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Chapter 48
TSX PSY 3610 power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Characteristics of the TSX PSY 3610 power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Chapter 49
TSX PSY 5520 power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Characteristics of the TSX PSY 5520 power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
35011052.06 07/2008
11
Part VI Process and AS-i supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Chapter 50
Process and AS-i supply: introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
General introduction to Process and AS-i power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Physical description of TBX SUP 10 supply block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Physical description of the TSX SUP 1011 supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Physical description of TSX 1021/1051 supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Physical description of the TSX SUP A02 supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Description of TSX SUP 1101/A05 supply blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Physical description of the support board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Process supply: auxiliary functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
AS-i supply module: dedicated features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Chapter 51
Process and AS-i suppliers: installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
TBX SUP 10 dimensions/mounting/connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Dimensions/mounting Process and AS-i supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
TSX SUP 1101/A05 supply block dimensions/mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Summary of mounting methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Chapter 52
Process supply modules: connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Connection of TSX SUP 1011/1021 power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Connection of TSX SUP 1051 power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Connection of TSX SUP 1101 power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Chapter 53
Connecting AS-i supply modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Connection of TSX SUP A02 power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Connecting TSX SUP A05 supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
General precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Chapter 54
Process and AS-i supply module characteristics. . . . . . . . . 449
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Electrical characteristics of process supply modules: TBX SUP 10 and
TSX SUP 1011. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Electrical characteristics of process supply modules:
TSX SUP 1021/1051/1101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Electrical characteristics of AS-i supply modules: TSX SUP A02/A05 . . . . . . . 454
Physical environmental characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Index
12
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
35011052.06 07/2008
Safety Information
§
Important Information
NOTICE
Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar with
the device before trying to install, operate, or maintain it. The following special
messages may appear throughout this documentation or on the equipment to warn
of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a
procedure.
The addition of this symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label indicates
that an electrical hazard exists, which will result in personal injury if the
instructions are not followed.
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal
injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid
possible injury or death.
DANGER
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, can result
in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, can result
in injury or equipment damage.
35011052.06 07/2008
13
Safety Information
PLEASE NOTE
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by
qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any
consequences arising out of the use of this material.
© 2008 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.
14
35011052.06 07/2008
About the Book
At a Glance
Document Scope
This manual describes the installation of the Premium range of PLCs and their main
accessories:
It is made up of 6 sections:
1 General introduction to a TSX P57 PLC station and a PCX 57 PLC station,
2 Standard and extendable TSX RKY racks ,
z 3 TSX P57 Premium Processors,
z 4 PCX 57 Atrium Processors,
z 5 TSX PSY power supply modules,
z 6 Process and AS-i Power Supplies.
z
z
Validity Note
The updated version of this manual takes the new processors into account.
User Comments
We welcome your comments about this document. You can reach us by e-mail at
[email protected]
35011052.06 07/2008
15
About the Book
16
35011052.06 07/2008
Premium and Atrium PLC stations
I
At a Glance
Aim of this Part
The Part gives a general introduction to the Premium TSX P57 PLC station and the
Atrium PCX 57 PLC station.
What's in this
Part?
This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter
Chapter Name
Page
Introduction to Premium and Atrium PLC stations
19
2
General introduction to the components of a PLC station
23
3
General introduction to the different configurations of a PLC
station
47
4
Operating Standards and Conditions
55
1
35011052.06 07/2008
17
TSX P57/PCX 57 stations
18
35011052.06 07/2008
Introduction to Premium and
Atrium PLC stations
1
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
This Chapter gives a general introduction to TSX P57 and PCX 57 PLC stations.
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
35011052.06 07/2008
Topic
Page
TSX P57 PLC station
20
PCX 57 PLC station
21
19
Introduction to Premium and Atrium PLC stations
TSX P57 PLC station
General
Premium TSX P57 automated platform processors manage the entire PLC station,
which is made up of "Discrete" input/output modules, analog input/output modules
and application-specific modules. These can be distributed over one or several
racks connected to the bus X or the field bus.
Illustration
Example of a TSX P57 PLC station:
7
5
1
Number table
3
4
Description according to the addresses in the diagram above:
Number
20
2
6
Description
1
Double format power supply module.
2
Processor module.
3
Bus X extension module.
4
Input/output module.
5
Standard format power supply module.
6
Processor module.
7
TSX RKY rack.
35011052.06 07/2008
Introduction to Premium and Atrium PLC stations
PCX 57 PLC station
General
Atrium PCX 57 coprocessors are built into a PC and manage an entire PLC station
composed of the same input/output modules as the Premium processors (i.e.
"Discrete", analog, application and communication modules). These modules can
be distributed over one or more racks connected to the bus X.
Illustration
Example of a PCX 57 PLC station:
4
3
2
1
Number table
35011052.06 07/2008
Description according to the addresses in the diagram above:
Number
Description
1
Coprocessor.
2
Supply module.
3
Input/output modules.
4
TSX RKY rack.
21
Introduction to Premium and Atrium PLC stations
22
35011052.06 07/2008
General introduction to the
components of a PLC station
2
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
The aim of this Chapter is to provide an overview of the different components which
may make up a PLC station.
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
35011052.06 07/2008
Topic
Page
General Introduction to TSX P57 Processors
24
General introduction to PCX 57 processors
26
General introduction to TSX RKY racks
27
General introduction to TSX PSY power supply modules
28
General introduction to Process and AS-i TSX SUP and TSX 1021/1051
power supply modules
29
General introduction to the TSX REY bus X extension module
31
General introduction to TSX DEY/DSY/DMY input/output modules
32
General introduction to TSX CTY/CCY counting modules
34
Introduction to TSX CAY axis control modules
35
General introduction to TSX CFY step by step control modules
37
General introduction to TSX SCY/ETY communication
38
General introduction to the AS-i bus interface module: TSX SAY
43
General introduction to the TSX ISPY weighing module
44
General introduction to the TSX FAN ventilation module
45
General introduction to the TSX PAY emergency stop monitoring module
46
23
General introduction to the components of a PLC station
General Introduction to TSX P57 Processors
General Points
Each PLC station is provided with a processor, chosen according to:
its integration type: integration on rack or integration in a PC,
the processing power necessary: number of discrete I/Os, analog I/Os, etc. ,
z memory capacity,
z processing type: sequential or sequential + process control.
z
z
See TSX P57/TSX H57 Premium processors, p. 145.
Table of different sequential and rack-insertable processor format types:
Processor
Illustration
Standard format processors:
z TSX P57 103,
z TSX P57 153.
Standard format processors with heat sink:
z TSX P57 353 LA,
24
35011052.06 07/2008
General introduction to the components of a PLC station
Processor
Illustration
Double format processors:
z TSX P57 203,
z TSX P57 253,
z TSX P57 303/303A,
z TSX P57 353/353A,
z TSX P57 453/453A.
Double format processors with on-board
Ethernet:
z TSX P57 2623,
z TSX P57 2823,
z TSX P57 3623/3623A,
z TSX P57 4823/4823A.
35011052.06 07/2008
25
General introduction to the components of a PLC station
General introduction to PCX 57 processors
General points
Installed on the ISA bus of an industrial or office PC running in a Windows 95 or NT
environment, they are used to control a PLC station.
Also, installation of a communication driver enables transparent communication
between the host PC and the processor, without the need for another programming
terminal.
There are two types of sequential Atrium PCX 57 processor that can be integrated
in a PC:
z
z
PCX 57 203,
PCX 57.353.
See Atrium PCX 57 processors, p. 283.
Illustration
Illustration of a PCX 57 processor:
PCX 57 203/353
26
35011052.06 07/2008
General introduction to the components of a PLC station
General introduction to TSX RKY racks
General points
Two families of racks are offered:
Standard racks 6, 8 and 12 positions:
they are used to build a PLC station which is limited to a single rack,
z Extendable racks 4, 6, 8 and 12 positions:
they are used to make up a PLC station that can contain up to:
z a maximum of 16 racks if the station is made up of racks with 4, 6, or 8
positions,
z a maximum of 8 racks if the station is made up of racks with 12 positions.
z
See TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks, p. 65.
Examples
The following illustration shows the standard 6-position TSX RKY rack:
The following illustration shows the extendable 12-position TSX RKY rack:
X Bus
35011052.06 07/2008
27
General introduction to the components of a PLC station
General introduction to TSX PSY power supply modules
General points
Each rack requires a power supply module (see TSX PSY supply modules, p. 339)
defined according to the distributed network (alternating or direct current) and the
power required for the rack.
There are two types of modules:
z
z
Illustration
standard format power supply module,
double format power supply module.
The following illustration shows the two formats for TSX PSY power supply modules:
standard format supply
module for alternating or
direct current network
28
double format supply
module for alternating or
direct current network
35011052.06 07/2008
General introduction to the components of a PLC station
General introduction to Process and AS-i TSX SUP and TSX 1021/1051 power
supply modules
Process power
supply modules
A wide range of power supply units and modules are offered to meet your needs in
the best possible way. Controlled by Premium TSX/PCX PLCs and designed to
supply the peripherals of an automation system with 24 VDC, they can all be
mounted on a Telequick AM1-PA mounting board and some can be mounted on a
AM1-DP200 / DE 200 central DIN rail.
SeeProcess and AS-i supply, p. 403.
Illustration
The following illustration shows the various types of TSX SUP and TSX 1021/1051
process power supply modules:
24 VDC / 1A
24 VDC / 1A
24 VDC / 2A
24 VDC / 5A
24 VDC / 10A
35011052.06 07/2008
29
General introduction to the components of a PLC station
AS-i power
supply module
They are designed to supply 30 VDC to components connected to the AS-i field bus.
Illustration:
30 VDC AS-i / 2.4 A
30
30 VDC AS-i / 5A and 24 VDC
35011052.06 07/2008
General introduction to the components of a PLC station
General introduction to the TSX REY bus X extension module
General
This module allows the extension of two bus segments from the rack supporting the
processor, up to a maximum distance of 250 meters. Each extended segment is
able to support racks distributed along the bus X to a maximum length of 100
meters.
See X-Bus extension module, p. 125.
Illustration: TSX REY bus X extension module
35011052.06 07/2008
31
General introduction to the components of a PLC station
General introduction to TSX DEY/DSY/DMY input/output modules
Discrete inputs/
outputs
A wide range of discrete input/output modules (Installation Manual Volume 2) are
available to meet your needs in the best possible way. These modules differ from
one another in their:
Characteristics
Description
modularity
8, 16, 28, 32 or 64 channels.
type of inputs
z modules with direct current inputs (24VDC, 48VDC),
z modules with alternating current inputs (24VAC, 48VAC,
110VAC, 240VAC).
type of outputs
z modules with relay outputs,
z modules with direct current (24VDC / 0.1A - 0.5A - 2A, 48VDC
/ 0.25A - 1A) static outputs,
z modules with alternating current (24VAC / 130VAC / 1A,
48VAC / 240 VAC / 2A) static outputs.
type of connectors
screw terminal blocks and HE10 connectors allow the connection
of sensors and pre-actuators via the TELEFAST 2 prewiring
system.
Illustration:
HE10 connector
64 I/64 O
32
Screw terminal block
connector
32 I/32 O
28 I/O (16+12 O) 16 I
32 I
8 I - 16 I
8 O - 16 O
35011052.06 07/2008
General introduction to the components of a PLC station
Analog inputs/
outputs
The range of analog input and output modules (Installation Manual Volume 5) can
meet your main needs. These modules differ from one another in their:
Characteristics
Description
modularity
4, 8, 16 channels.
performance and range of signals offered
voltage/current, thermoelectric couple, multirange (thermoelectric couple, heat probe,
voltage/current).
type of connectors
screw terminal blocks or 25-pin SUB D
connectors allow the connection of the
sensors via the TELEFAST 2 prewiring
system.
Example: 25-pin SUB D connectors
Example: screw terminal block connectors
35011052.06 07/2008
33
General introduction to the components of a PLC station
General introduction to TSX CTY/CCY counting modules
General points
Premium and Atrium PLCs offer main counting functions (down-counting, upcounting, up/down counting) from the application-specific "counting" modules.
Three modules are offered:
a 2-channel module and a 4-channel module for the incremental encoder, with a
maximum reading frequency of 40 kHz,
z a 2-channel module for:
z incremental encoder, with a maximum reading frequency of 500 kHz,
z absolute SSI series encoder, with a maximum reading frequency of 2 MHz.
z
Illustration
Illustration of different types of TSX CTY/CCY counting modules:
2-channel module
4-channel module
2-channel module (incremental
encoder/absolute series encoder).
34
35011052.06 07/2008
General introduction to the components of a PLC station
Introduction to TSX CAY axis control modules
General points
Using the application-specific "axis control" modules (Installation Manual Volume 3),
Premium PLCs can be used to manage movement control applications, driven by
servomotors and with an analog value speed setpoint (+/- 10V).
Five modules are offered:
35011052.06 07/2008
Module
characteristics
2-channel module
allows controlled positioning with two independent, linear,
limited axes.
2-channel module
allows controlled positioning with two independent, circular,
infinite axes.
4-channel module
allows controlled positioning with four independent, linear,
limited axes.
4-channel module
allows controlled positioning with four independent, circular
axes.
3-channel module
allows positioning on 2 or 3 synchronized axes (linear
interpolation).
35
General introduction to the components of a PLC station
Illustration
Illustration of different types of TSX CAY axis control modules:
2-channel module
4-channel module
3-channel module
36
35011052.06 07/2008
General introduction to the components of a PLC station
General introduction to TSX CFY step by step control modules
General points
Using application-specific "step by step command" modules (Installation Manual
Volume 3), Premium and Atrium PLCs can be used to manage movement control
modules, controlled by translators with a frequency speed setpoint.
Two modules are offered:
z
z
Illustration
a 1-channel module which is used to control a translator,
a 2-channel module which is used to control two translators,
Illustration of different types of TSX CFY modules:
1-channel
35011052.06 07/2008
2-channel
37
General introduction to the components of a PLC station
General introduction to TSX SCY/ETY communication
General points
Different modes of communication (Installation Manual Volume 4)can be used with
Premium PLCs:
TSX processor communication on the terminal port:
these have two terminal ports (TER) and (AUX), a non-insulated RS 485 serial
link, UNI-TELWAY or character mode protocol.
These terminal ports can be used to connect:
z a programming terminal and/or an operator dialog console (UNI-TELWAY
master mode),
z the station to a multipoint UNITELWAY link (master or slave UNI-TELWAY
mode),
z a printer or a terminal in character mode.
Note: the communication protocol, as defined in the configuration, is identical for
both ports.
z PSX processor communication on the terminal port:
these have one terminal port (TER), a non-insulated RS 485 serial link, UNITELWAY or character mode protocol.
As with TSX processors, these can be used to connect:
z a programming terminal or an operator dialog console (UNI-TELWAY master
mode),
z the station to a multipoint UNITELWAY link (master or slave UNI-TELWAY
mode),
z a printer or a terminal in character mode.
z Master FIPIO communication, built-in to some processors,
TSX P57x53 and PCX P57 353 processors feature as standard a master FIPIO
link, used to provide remote operation (maximum 15 kms) of devices such as:
- discrete I/Os,
- analog I/Os,
- speed drives,
- operation and supervising stations,
- devices,
- etc.
z Communication by means of PCMCIA cards which can be built into the
processor or the application-specific communication module TSX SCY
21601: the processors and the application-specific communication module TSX
SCY 21601 have a slot which is used for accommodating an extended type III
PCMCIA communication card,
z Communication via application-specific modules:
TSX SCY 2160 module:
This module, which can be integrated in all TSX/PCX Premium PLC station racks,
has:
z
38
35011052.06 07/2008
General introduction to the components of a PLC station
a built-in communication channel (1), multiprotocol (UNITELWAY, Modbus/
Jbus, character mode), isolated RS 485 serial link,
z a slot (2) for receiving an extended PCMCIA type III format communication
card.
TSX ETY 110/4102/5102 module:
Module enabling communication in an Ethernet multi-network architecture with a
communication channel providing two types of connection:
z connection to an ETHWAY network,
z connection to an TCP_IP network.
z
PCMCIA cards
35011052.06 07/2008
PCMCIA type III format communication cards (see TSX P57/TSX H57 processors:
diagnostics, p. 177).
39
General introduction to the components of a PLC station
Illustrations
The following table illustrates the different modes of communication:
Illustration
Description
TER and AUX ports on TSX
processors.
TER ports on PCX processors.
FIPIO link on TSX processors.
40
35011052.06 07/2008
General introduction to the components of a PLC station
Illustration
Description
FIPIO link on PCX processors.
Built-in Ethernet links for TSX
P57 ••23 processors.
Communication by means of
PCMCIA cards which can be
built in to the processor or the
module.
35011052.06 07/2008
41
General introduction to the components of a PLC station
Illustration
Description
Communication via
application-specific module
TSX SCY 21601:
z 1 : built-in communication
channel,
z 2 : slot for PCMCIA card.
Communication via
application-specific module
TSX ETY 110.
42
35011052.06 07/2008
General introduction to the components of a PLC station
General introduction to the AS-i bus interface module: TSX SAY
General points
This is a module which is used to connect an AS-i bus to a Premium TSX/PCX PLC
station.
This master module (Installation Manual Volume 4) manages and coordinates bus
access. It transmits data to all slaves and receives data from them.
Illustration
35011052.06 07/2008
Illustration of the TSX SAY 100 module:
43
General introduction to the components of a PLC station
General introduction to the TSX ISPY weighing module
General
Using the TSX ISPY 101 and TSX ISPY 101 application-specific "weighing"
modules. Premium PLCs can be used to manage weighing applications: dosage,
multi-product dosage, grading, flow control, weight totalizer, etc.
This module offers a measurement input for a maximum of 8 sensors, 2 rapid
discrete outputs and a serial link for a displayed report.
Illustration
44
Illustration of the TSX ISPY 100/101 module:
35011052.06 07/2008
General introduction to the components of a PLC station
General introduction to the TSX FAN ventilation module
General
Depending on the rack modularity (4, 6, 8 or 12 positions), one, two or three
ventilation modules can be installed above each rack to help cool the different
modules by forced convection.
These ventilation units should be used in the following scenarios:
z
z
Ambient temperature in the 25°C...60°C range,
Ambient temperature in the 60°C70°C range.
Three types of ventilation module are offered:
ventilation module with 110 VAC power supply,
ventilation module with 220 VAC power supply,
z ventilation module with 24 VDC supply,
z
z
See Ventilation module, p. 113.
Illustration
35011052.06 07/2008
Illustration of the TSX FAN ventilation module:
45
General introduction to the components of a PLC station
General introduction to the TSX PAY emergency stop monitoring module
General points
These are modules (Installation Manual Volume 2) designed to control machine
emergency stop circuits per category 4 according to the EN 954-1 standard.
Two modules are offered:
z
z
1 module consisting of 12 inputs and 2 outputs,
1 module consisting of 12 inputs and 4 outputs.
Illustration of the TSX PAY module:
46
35011052.06 07/2008
General introduction to the
different configurations of a PLC
station
3
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
This Chapter gives a general introduction to the different configurations which are
possible for TSX and PCX PLC stations.
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
35011052.06 07/2008
Topic
Page
Different types of Premium PLC Stations
48
Different types of PLC stations with Atrium processors.
51
47
General introduction to the different configurations of a PLC station
Different types of Premium PLC Stations
The choice of rack (standard or extendable) and processor type defines the
maximum capacities of a Premium PLC station.
z
TSX P57 10
Station
the TSX P57 stations are composed of TSX P57 103,153 and 353LA single
format processors and TSX P57 203/253/2623/2823/303/303A/353/353A/3623/
3623A/453/453A/4823/4823A double format processors.
Without bus X extension module:
Station with standard rack:
1 rack, 6, 8 or 12 positions.
Station with
extendable rack: 2
racks 12 positions or, 4
racks 4, 6 or 8
positions, maximum
length of bus X: 100
meters
100 m max
General Points
With bus X extension module:
Principal bus X segment
Bus X
≤ 100 m
Remote bus X segment
Remote bus X
Bus X
≤ 250 meters
≤ 100 m
Station with extendable racks: 2 racks 12
positions or, 4 racks 4, 6 or 8 positions, 2
remotes possible, maximum length of a
remote: 250 meters, maximum length of the
bus X segments: 100 meters.
Processor
48
35011052.06 07/2008
General introduction to the different configurations of a PLC station
TSX 57 20/30/40
Station
Without bus X extension module:
Station with standard rack:
1 rack, 6, 8 or 12 positions.
Station with
extendable rack: 8
racks 12 positions or,
16 racks 4, 6 or 8
positions, maximum
length of bus X: 100
meters
100 meters max.
35011052.06 07/2008
49
General introduction to the different configurations of a PLC station
With bus X extension module:
Principal bus X segment
Segment 1 remote from bus X
Remote bus X
≤ 250 meters
Bus X
≤ 100 m
Bus X
≤ 100 m
Processor
Station with extendable racks: 8 racks 12
positions or, 16 racks 4, 6 or 8 positions, 2
remotes possible, maximum length of a
remote: 250 meters, maximum length of the
bus X segments: 100 meters.
50
Remote bus X
Bus X
≤ 250 meters
≤ 100 m
Segment 2 remote from bus X
35011052.06 07/2008
General introduction to the different configurations of a PLC station
Different types of PLC stations with Atrium processors.
General points
By selecting the PCX 57 203 or 353 processor type, you set the maximum capacities
of a Premium PCX PLC station.
This type of station, with the processor integrated in a PC, will be controlled with
extendable racks.
PCX 57 203
station
Without bus X extension module:
Extendable racks
TSXRKY∞∞EX
PCX 57203
X1
PC
Station with extendable racks:
2 racks 12 positions or,
4 racks 4, 6 or 8 positions,
maximum length of bus X (X1+X2): 100
meters.
X2
With bus X extension module:
Segment 1 remote from bus X
Bus X
≤ 100 m
PCX 57353
PC
Segment 2 remote from Bus X
Station with extendable racks:
2 racks 12 positions or,
4 racks 4, 6 or 8 positions,
2 possible remotes,
maximum length of a remote: 250 meters – X1,
maximum length of the bus X segments: 100
meters.
35011052.06 07/2008
51
General introduction to the different configurations of a PLC station
PCX 57 353
station
Without bus X extension module:
Extendable racks
TSXRKY∞∞EX
PCX 57353
X1
PC
Station with extendable racks:
8 racks 12 positions or,
16 racks 4, 6 or 8 positions,
maximum length of bus X (X1+X2): 100 meters
X2
52
35011052.06 07/2008
General introduction to the different configurations of a PLC station
With bus X extension module:
Segment 1 remote from bus X
Bus X
remote bus X
≤ 100m
≤ 250m-X1
PCX 57353
Principal bus X segment
Bus X
remote bus X
≤ 100m
≤250m-X1
Segment 2 remote from bus X
Station with extendable racks:
8 racks 12 positions or,
16 racks 4, 6 or 8 positions,
two possible remotes,
maximum length of a remote: 250 meters – X1
maximum length of the bus X segments: 100 meters
35011052.06 07/2008
53
General introduction to the different configurations of a PLC station
54
35011052.06 07/2008
Operating Standards and
Conditions
4
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
This chapter deals with the operating standards and conditions of Premium and
Atrium PLCs.
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
35011052.06 07/2008
Topic
Page
Standards and Certification
56
Operating conditions and environmental conditions to be avoided
57
Premium PLC protection processing
64
55
Operating Standards and Conditions
Standards and Certification
General
Premium and Atrium PLCs have been developed to conform to the principal national
and international standards for industrial electronic PLC equipment.
Programmable PLCs: specific requirements: functional characteristics,
resistance, safety etc.
IEC 61131-2, CSA 22.2 N° 142, UL 508
z Merchant navy requirements of the major international organizations:
ABS, BV, DNV, GL, LROS, RINA, RRS, CCS etc.
z Adhering to European Directives:
Low Voltage: 73/23/EEC amendment 93/68/EEC
Electromagnetic Compatibility: 89/336/EEC amendments 92/31/EEC and 93/68/
EEC
z Electric qualities and self-extinguishability of insulating materials: UL 746C, UL
94
z Danger Zones Cl1 Div2 CSA 22.2 N° 213
z
DANGER
Explosion Hazard:
THIS EQUIPMENT IS SUITABLE FOR USE IN CLASS I, DIVISION 2, GROUPS
A, B, C AND D OR NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS ONLY "WARNING:
"EXPLOSION HAZARD - DO NOT DISCONNECT WHILE CIRCUIT IS LIVE
UNLESS AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NON-HAZARDOUS"
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
56
35011052.06 07/2008
Operating Standards and Conditions
Operating conditions and environmental conditions to be avoided
Operating
temperature/
hygrometry/
altitude
Data table:
Ambient temperature when
operative
0°C to +60°C (IEC 1131-2 = +5°C to +55°C)
Relative humidity
10% to 95% (without condensation)
Altitude
0 to 2000 meters
Power supply
voltages
Data table:
Voltage
nominal
24 VDC
48 VDC
100 to 240VAC
100...120/200...240 VAC
limit
19 to 30 VDC
19...60VDC (1)
90 to 264 VAC
90 to 140/190 to 264VAC
nominal
-
-
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
limit
-
-
47/63 Hz
47/63 Hz
duration
≤ 1 μs
≤ 1 μs
≤ 1/2 period
≤ 1/2 period
repetition
≥1s
≥1s
≥1s
≥1s
Frequency
Brown-outs
Harmonic rate
-
-
10%
10%
Residual ripple
included
5%
5%
-
-
(1) Possible up to 34 VDC, limited to 1 hour every 24 hours.
For TSX PSY 1610 and TSX PSY 3610 power supplies, and when using relay output
modules, this scope is reduced to 21.6V...26.4V.
35011052.06 07/2008
57
Operating Standards and Conditions
Human and
material safety
Data table:
Test Designation
Norms
Levels
Dielectric rigidity and
Isolation resistance *
IEC 61131-2
UL 508
CSA 22-2 N°142
IEC 60950
24 - 48 V Power supply
100 -220 V Power supply
< 48V Discrete I/Os
> 48V Discrete I/Os
> 10 MΩ
Maintaining ground
connections*
IEC 61131-2
UL 508
CSA 22-2 N°142
< 0.1 Ω / 30 A / 2 min
Leakage Current *
CSA 22-2 N°142
IEC 60950
< 3.5 mA fixed device
Enclosures for protection * IEC 61131-2
CSA 22-2 N°142
IEC 60950
IP 20
Impact Resistance
Drop / 1.3 m / 500 g Sphere
CSA 22-2 N°142
IEC 60950
1500 Vrms
2000 Vrms
500 Vrms
2000 Vrms
Legend
*: Tests required by EC directives
Note: The devices must be installed and wired according to the directions in the
TSX DG KBL• manual.
58
35011052.06 07/2008
Operating Standards and Conditions
Resistance of
devices to power
supply L.F.
turbulence
Data table:
Test Designation
Norms
Levels
Voltage and frequency
Variation *
EN 50082-1
Un 15% / Nf 5%
Un 20% / Nf 10%
Continuous voltage
variation *
EN 50082-1
0.85 Un - 1.2 Un
+ 5% ripple maximum
Harmonic 3 *
IEC 61131-2
10% Un
0° / 5 min - 180° / 5 min
Momentary
Interruptions *
IEC 61131-2
AC
DC
Voltage peaks and
troughs *
IEC 61131-2
Un-0-Un; Un / 60s 3 cycles separated by 10 s
Un-0-Un; Un / 5s 3 cycles separated by 1 to 5 s
Un-0.9-Un; Un / 60s 3 cycles separated by 1 to 5 s
30 min x 2
5sx2
30 + 30 min
10 ms
1 ms
Legend
Un: Nominal Voltage Nf: Nominal Frequency Ud: Power-on detection level
*: Tests required by EC directives
Note: The devices must be installed and wired according to the directions in the
TSX DG KBL• manual.
35011052.06 07/2008
59
Operating Standards and Conditions
Resistance to
H.F. turbulence
Data table:
Test Designation
Norms
Levels
Amortized oscillatory
wave *
IEC 61131-2
IEC 61000-4-12
AC / DC
24 V Discrete I/Os
1 kV SM
1 kV SM
Fast transients (bursts) EN 50082-1
*
IEC 61000-4-4
AC / DC Power Supply
48 V > Discrete I/Os
other ports
2 kV WM / CM
2 kV CM
1 kV CM
Hybrid shockwave
AC / DC Power Supply
AC Discrete I/Os
DC Discrete I/Os
Shielded Cable
2 kV WM / 1 kV SM
2 kV WM / 1 kV SM
2 kV WM / 0.5 kV SM
1 kV CM
IEC 61000-4-5
Electrostatic Discharge IEC 61131-2
*
IEC 61000-4-2
6 kV contact
8 kV air
Electromagnetic Field * EN 50082-2
IEC 61000-4-3
10 V/m, 80MHz - 2 GHz
Sinusoidal modulation amplitude 80% / 1kHz
Conduit Turbulence *
10 V 0.15 MHz - 80 MHz
Sinusoidal modulation amplitude 80% / 1kHz
EN 50082-2
IEC 61000-4-6
Legend
SM: Serial mode CM: Common Mode WM: Wire Mode
*: Tests required by EC directives
Note: The devices must be installed and wired according to the directions in the
TSX DG KBL• manual.
60
35011052.06 07/2008
Operating Standards and Conditions
Electromagnetic
Emissions
Data table:
Test Designation
Norms
Levels
Conduction Limits *
EN55022/55011
EN50081-2
Class A
150 kHz - 500 kHz quasi-peak 79 dB mV
average 66 dB mV
500 kHz -30 kHz quasi-peak 73 dB mV
average 60 dB mV
Emission Limits *(1)
EN55022/55011
EN50081-2
Class A
d = 10 m
30 kHz -230 kHz quasi-peak 30 dB mV/m
230 kHz -1 kHz quasi-peak 37 dB mV/m
Legend
(1) This test is carried out outside the casing, with the devices secured to a metallic
grill and wired as shown in the TSX DG KBL• Manual.
*: Tests required by EC directives
Note: The devices must be installed and wired according to the directions in the
TSX DG KBL• manual.
35011052.06 07/2008
61
Operating Standards and Conditions
Resistance to
climatic variation
Data table:
Test Designation
Norms
Levels
Dry heat
IEC60068-2-2 Bd
60°C / 16h (E.O)
40°C / 16h (E.F)
Cold
IEC60068-2-1 Ad
0°C / 16h
Continuous humid heat IEC60068-2-30 Ca
60°C / 93% Hr /96h (E.O)
40°C / 93% Hr /96h (E.F)
Cyclical humid heat
IEC60068-2-30 Db
(55°C E.O / 40°C E.F); - 25°C / 93-95% Hr
2 cycles: 12 o' clock - 12h o' clock
Cyclical temperature
variations
IEC60068-2-14 Nb
0°C; -60°C / 5 Cycles: 6 o'clock-6 o'clock
(E.O.)
0°C; -40°C / 5 Cycles: 6 o'clock-6 o'clock
(E.F)
Temperature Rise
IEC61131-2
UL508
CSA22-2 N°142
Ambient temperature: 60°C
Legend
E.O: Device open E.F: Device closed Hr: Relative Humidity
Resistance to
mechanical
constraints
Data table:
Test Designation
Standards
Levels
Sinusoidal vibrations
IEC60068-2-6 Fc
3 Hz - 100 Hz / 1 mm amplitude / 0.7 Gn
Endurance: rf / 90 min / axis (Q limit) < 10
3 Hz - 150 Hz / 1.5 mm / 2 Gn
Endurance: 10 cycles (1 octave / min)
Half-sinus shocks
IEC60068-2-27 Ea
15 Gn x 11 ms
3 shocks / direct. / axis
Legend
rf: Resonance Frequency Q: Amplification Coefficient
62
35011052.06 07/2008
Operating Standards and Conditions
Resistance to
climatic variation
Resistance to
mechanical
constraints
35011052.06 07/2008
Data table:
Test Designation
Standards
Levels
Dry heat whilst inoperative
IEC60068-2-2 Bb
70°C / 96h
Cold whilst inoperative
IEC60068-2-1 Ab
-25°C / 96h
Humid heat whilst inoperative
IEC60068-2-30 dB
60°C; - 25°C / 93-95% Hr
2 cycles: 12 o' clock - 12h o'
clock
Thermal shocks whilst inoperative
IEC60068-2-14 Na
-25°C; -70°C / 2 Cycles: 3
o'clock - 3 o'clock
Standards
Levels
Flat free drop
IEC60068-2-32 Ed
10 cm / 2 drops
Free drop from controlled position
IEC60068-2-31 Ec
30° or 10 cm / 2 drops
Random free drop (conditioned
material)
IEC60068-2-32
Method 1
1 m / 5 drops
Data table:
Test Designation
63
Operating Standards and Conditions
Premium PLC protection processing
General points
PLCs in the Premium and Atrium range meet AP (all-climate processing) processing
requirements.
For installations used in industrial production workshops or in environments which
come under the title HP (processors in heat and humidity) processing, the Premium
PLCs must be inserted into a protection casing (minimum IP54 as outlined by
standards IEC 60664 and NF C 20 040).
Premium PLCs have an IP20 protection index. They can thus be installed without a
protection casing in restricted-access areas which do not exceed Pollution Degree
2 (control room free of machines or any activity creating dust).
The Atrium card is designed for integration into a host PC. The host device must
therefore conform to the IP20 protection index.
CAUTION
Maintaining IP protection index
For a rack to conform to the IP20 protection index, the unoccupied module slots
must be protected by a TSX RKA 02 protection cover.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
64
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX RKY.. standard and
extendable racks
II
At a Glance
Subject of this
Part
This part concerns TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks
What's in this
Part?
This part contains the following chapters:
35011052.06 07/2008
Chapter
Chapter Name
Page
5
Introduction to TSX RKY .. standard/extendable racks.
67
6
TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks : installation/
mounting
77
7
TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks: functions
85
8
TSX RKY Racks: accessories
99
9
Ventilation module
113
10
X-Bus extension module
125
65
TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks
66
35011052.06 07/2008
Introduction to TSX RKY ..
standard/extendable racks.
5
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
This Chapter deals with:
z
z
What's in this
Chapter?
35011052.06 07/2008
general points regarding TSX RKY racks,
the physical description of these racks.
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Page
Standard and extendable TSX RKY racks
68
Standard rack: description
72
Extendable rack: description
74
67
Introduction to TSX RKY .. standard/extendable racks.
Standard and extendable TSX RKY racks
General points
TSX RKY racks form the base unit of Premium PLCs.
These racks serve the following functions:
Mechanical function:
they are used to mount a set of modules for a PLC station (i.e. supply modules,
processors, discrete/analog input/output modules, application-specific modules).
They can be mounted in cabinets, machine frames or on panels.
z Electrical function:
the racks have a built-in bus, called bus X, which distributes:
z the required supply for each module on the same rack,
z service signals and data for the whole PLC station when this is made up of
several racks.
z
Note: two families of racks are offered in several modularities (4, 6, 8 and 12
positions):
z standard racks,
z extendable racks.
68
35011052.06 07/2008
Introduction to TSX RKY .. standard/extendable racks.
Standard racks
They are used to make up a PLC station which is limited to a single rack.
This table presents the different standard racks:
35011052.06 07/2008
Designation
Illustration
TSX RKY 6
6-position rack
TSX RKY 8
8-position rack
TSX RKY 12
12-position rack
69
Introduction to TSX RKY .. standard/extendable racks.
Extendable racks
They are used to make up a PLC station which can have:
z
z
a maximum of 8 TSX RKY 12 EX racks,
a maximum of 16 TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks.
These racks are distributed on a bus called bus X, whose maximum length is limited
to 100 meters.
A bus extension cable assures rack-to-rack bus continuity.
For applications which require a greater distance, a bus X extension module allows
the extension of two bus X segments from the rack which is supporting the
processor to a maximum distance of 250 meters.
This table presents the different extendable racks:
70
Designation
Illustration
TSX RKY 4EX
4-position rack
TSX RKY 6EX
6-position rack
35011052.06 07/2008
Introduction to TSX RKY .. standard/extendable racks.
35011052.06 07/2008
Designation
Illustration
TSX RKY 8EX
8-position rack
TSX RKY 12EX
12-position rack
71
Introduction to TSX RKY .. standard/extendable racks.
Standard rack: description
At a Glance
They are used to make up a PLC station which is limited to a single rack.
Illustration
Standard rack
1
3
9
6
4
6
8
72
7
5
6
2
35011052.06 07/2008
Introduction to TSX RKY .. standard/extendable racks.
Description
The following table describes the different elements of a standard rack.
Number
35011052.06 07/2008
Description
1
Metal sheet which:
z supports the bus X electronic card, and protects against EMI and ESD
interference.
z supports the modules,
z maintains the rack’s physical rigidity.
2
Holes to be used as anchor-points for module pins.
3
Female 48-pin 1/2 DIN connectors for connecting each module to the rack.
When racks are delivered, these connectors are protected by covers, which
must be removed before modules are installed.
The connector on the farthest left marked PS is always dedicated to the rack
supply module. The other connectors marked 00 to .. are for receiving all the
other module types.
4
Screw-holes for the module-mounting screws.
5
Guide-hole to assist in mounting the supply module.
As supply modules have a projecting part on the back, this module cannot be
mounted in any other position.
6
Holes for mounting the rack onto a support. These holes can take M6 screws.
7
Slot to hold the label for the rack address.
8
Slot to hold the label for the station network address.
9
Ground terminals for grounding the rack.
73
Introduction to TSX RKY .. standard/extendable racks.
Extendable rack: description
At a Glance
They are used to form a PLC station which can be made up of several racks.
Illustration
Extendable rack
1
3
9
6
4
10
8
11
7
6
5
6
74
2
35011052.06 07/2008
Introduction to TSX RKY .. standard/extendable racks.
Description
The following table describes the different elements of an extendable rack.
Number
35011052.06 07/2008
Description
1
Metal sheet which:
z supports the bus X electronic card, and protects against EMI and ESD
interference.
z supports the modules,
z maintains the rack’s physical rigidity.
2
Holes to be used as anchor-points for module pins.
3
Female 48-pin 1/2 DIN connectors for connecting each module to the rack.
When racks are delivered, these connectors are protected by covers, which
must be removed before modules are installed.
The connector on the farthest left marked PS is always dedicated to the rack
supply module. The other connectors marked 00 to .. are for receiving all the
other module types.
4
Screw-holes for the module-mounting screws.
5
Guide-hole to assist in mounting the supply module.
As supply modules have a projecting part on the back, this module cannot be
mounted in any other position.
6
Holes for mounting the rack onto a support. These holes can take M6 screws.
7
Slot to hold the label for the rack address.
8
Slot to hold the label for the station network address.
9
Ground terminals for grounding the rack.
10
Microswitch for coding the rack address (extendable racks only).
11
Female 9-pin SUBD connectors for extending the bus X to another rack
(extendable rack only).
75
Introduction to TSX RKY .. standard/extendable racks.
76
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX RKY.. standard and
extendable racks : installation/
mounting
6
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
This chapter deals with:
z
z
What's in this
Chapter?
35011052.06 07/2008
rack installation,
mounting these racks.
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Page
Installing Racks
78
mounting and fixing racks
81
Connection of the ground to a TSX RKY rack
84
77
TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks: installation/mounting
Installing Racks
Introduction
When mounting TSX RKY •• racks, certain installation rules must to be followed.
Rack Installation
Rules:
Description
z
1 As the different modules (e.g. supply, processors, discrete I/O, etc.) are cooled
by natural convection, it is compulsory in order to facilitate ventilation (see
Ventilation module, p. 113) to install the different racks horizontally and
vertically.
z 2 If several racks are installed in the same cabinet, you are advised to comply
with the following advice on layout:
z leave at least 150 mm between two racks placed on top of each other, to allow
room for cable troughs and help air circulation.
z you are advised to install the devices which generate heat (eg transformers,
process supply, power contacts, etc.) above the racks,
z leave at least 100 mm on each side of a rack to allow room for cabling and to
help air circulation.
Note: If the hardware, other than the metal electrical cabinet, is installed in an area
with emissions limits between 30 MHz and 1GHz (as per EN 55022), you are
advised to use racks TSXRKY 8EX or TSXRKY6EX instead of TSXRKY8 and
TSXRKY6.
78
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks: installation/mounting
Illustration
The following illustration shows the rules for installation
a Greater than or equal to 50 mm.
1 Installation or casing.
2 Trough or cable tray.
35011052.06 07/2008
79
TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks: installation/mounting
The following illustrations show the overall dimensions of TSX RKY •• racks.
165 mm (1)
TSX RKY 4EX
151.5 mm
Overall Rack
Dimensions:
Illustrations
187.9 mm
TSX RKY 6/6EX
165 mm (1)
160 mm (1)
200 mm (2)
261.6 mm
TSX RKY 8/8EX
335.3 mm
TSX RKY 12/12EX
482.6 mm
(1) With screw terminal block modules.
(2) Maximum depth for all types of modules and their associated connectors.
80
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks: installation/mounting
mounting and fixing racks
Introduction
TSX RKY•• and TSX RKY••EX racks can be mounted:
z
z
on a 35 mm wide DIN mounting rail using M6x25 screws,
on a Telequick mounting grid or on a panel.
The rules for installation (see Installing Racks, p. 78) are to be always followed,
whatever the type of mounting.
Mounting on 35
mm wide DIN
mounting rail
Fixing with four M6x25 screws + washers and AF1-CF56 1/4 turn sliding nuts.
Diagram illustrating the mounting
(1) TSX RKY 4EX
(2) TSX RKY6 and TSX RKY 6EX
(3) TSX RKY8 and TSX RKY 8EX
(4) TSX RKY 12 and TSX RKY 12EX
35011052.06 07/2008
81
TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks: installation/mounting
Mounting on a
panel
Plan of screw-holes (dimensions in mm):
4 fixing holes
(1)
(1) the diameter of the fixing holes must be sufficient to take M6 screws.
(1) The diameter of the fixing holes must be such as to allow M6 screws.
a and b see table.
82
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks: installation/mounting
Mounting on an
AM1-PA
Telequick
mounting grid
Fix the rack using four M6x25 screws + washers and AF1-EA6 clips nuts.
Plan of screw-holes (dimensions in mm):
the following table presents mounting characteristics according to the different TSX
RKY racks:
Racks
a
b
Depth
TSX RKY 4EX
170.4 mm
187.9 mm
16 mm
TSX RKY 6/6EX
244.1 mm
261.6 mm
16 mm
TSX RKY 8/8EX
317.8 mm
335.3 mm
16 mm
TSX RKY 12/12EX
465.1 mm
482.6 mm
16 mm
Note: Maximum tightening torque for fixing screws: 2.0.N.m.(1.6 Lb.-ft.)
35011052.06 07/2008
83
TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks: installation/mounting
Connection of the ground to a TSX RKY rack
Grounding racks
Functional grounding of the racks is provided by the back, which is made of metal.
This means that the PLCs will be guaranteed to conform to environmental norms;
assuming, however, that the racks are fixed to a metal support that is correctly
connected to ground. The different racks which can make up a TSX P57/TSX H57
PLC station must be mounted either on the same support or on different supports,
as long as the latter are correctly interlinked.
DANGER
Correct grounding procedure
Each rack’s grounding terminal must be linked to the protective ground.
Use a green/yellow wire with a minimum section of 2.5 mm (12 AWG) and with
the shortest length possible.
z Maximum torque on the ground connection screw: 2.0 N.m (1.5 lb-ft).
z Install to confrom to all local and national codes.
z
z
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
Illustration:
support
connected
to the
ground
yellow/green wire linked to the ground
Note: The PLC’s internal 0V is linked to the ground connection. The ground
connection itself being linked to ground.
84
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX RKY.. standard and
extendable racks: functions
7
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
This chapter describes the different functions of the TSX RKY.. standard and
extendable racks.
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
35011052.06 07/2008
Topic
Page
Building a PLC station with Premium processor
86
Building a PLC station with Atrium processor
89
PLC station rack addressing
91
The principle of addressing two racks at the same address
93
Module addresses
94
Installing power supplies, processors and other modules
96
85
TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks: functions
Building a PLC station with Premium processor
Introduction
It is possible to build a PLC station with TSX P57 processor using:
z
z
Building using
standard racks
86
standard racks (see Standard racks, p. 69): TSX RKY 6/8/12,
extendable racks (see Extendable racks, p. 70): TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX/12EX.
Standard racks can be used to build a TSX P57 PLC station limited to a single rack.
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks: functions
Building using
extendable
racks: TSX RKY
4EX/6EX/8EX/
12EX
Extendable racks can be used to build a PLC station that contains a maximum of:
Station
Number of racks
For a TSX 57 10 station
z 2 TSX RKY 12EX racks,
z 4 TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks.
For a TSX 5720, 5730 or 5740 station
z 8 TSX RKY 12EX racks,
z 16 TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks.
100 meters maximum
Diagram
z (1) The same station can contain 4, 6, 8 and 12 position racks that are linked by Bus X
extension cables (see TSX CBY..0K bus X extension cable (II ≥ 02), p. 100) (labeled 1).
z (2)The bus X must have a line termination (see Line terminator TSX TLYEX, p. 105)
(labeled 2) fitted at each end.
35011052.06 07/2008
87
TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks: functions
Note: The total length of all the TSX CBY ..0K cables used in a PLC station must
never exceed 100 meters (328 feet). For applications which require a distance of
more than 100 meters between racks, an extension module allows the extension
of two bus X segments from the rack supporting the processor, to a maximum
distance of 250 meters (820 feet), each bus X segment having a maximum
distance of 100 meters.
Bus X extension
cable
Racks are connected by means of TSX CBY..0K bus X extension cables which are
connected to the 9-pin SUB D connectors situated on the right and left of each
extendable rack.
Note: As the idea of in and out does not exist at the level of the 9-pin SUB D
connector, a cable can enter or leave using either the right or left-hand connector.
Line termination
88
The two racks situated at the ends of the chain must always be fitted with a TSX TL
YEX line termination on the unused 9-pin SUB D connectors, labeled A/ and /B.
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks: functions
Building a PLC station with Atrium processor
At a Glance
It is possible to build a PLC station with PCX 57 processor using extendable racks:
TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX/12EX.
Building using
extendable racks
Extendable racks can be used to build a PLC station that contains a maximum of:
Station
Number of racks
For a PCX 57 203 station
z 8 TSX RKY 12EX racks,
z 16 TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks.
For a PCX 57 353 station
z 8 TSX RKY 12EX racks,
z 16 TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks.
Diagram:
TPCX 57 203
X1
PC
X2
35011052.06 07/2008
89
TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks: functions
(1) The same station can contain 4, 6, 8 and 12 position racks that are linked by
Bus X extension cables (see TSX CBY..0K bus X extension cable (II ≥ 02),
p. 100) (labeled 1).
z (2) The bus X must have a line termination (see Line terminator TSX TLYEX,
p. 105) (labeled 2) fitted at each end.
z
Note: the total length (X1 + X2) of all the TSX CBY ..0K cables used in a PLC
station must never exceed 100 meters (328 feet). For applications which require a
distance of more than 100 meters between racks, an extension module allows the
extension of two bus X segments from the rack supporting the processor, to a
maximum distance of 250 meters (820 feet), each bus segment having a maximum
distance of 100 meters.
Bus X extension
cable
Racks are connected by means of TSX CBY••0K bus X extension cables which are
connected to the 9-pin SUB D connectors situated on the right and left of each
extendable rack and at the top of the front panel of the processor.
Note: As the idea of in and out does not exist at the level of the 9-pin SUB D
connector, a cable can enter or leave using either the right or left-hand connector.
Line termination
At manufacture, the equivalent of the line terminator /A is built in to the processor
and, due to this, the processor forms a termination of the bus X. The extendable rack
located at the end of the chain therefore must always have a TSX TLY line
terminator, labeled /B on its unused 9-pin SUB D connector.
Note on the PCX
57 processor
By default, the PCX 57 processor is equipped to be mounted as the start of the bus
X, and thus, the line termination /A is built-in to it in the form of a removable
daughterboard.
If an application requires the integration of the processor inside a Bus X section, a
mechanical kit is supplied with the processor to satisfy this requirement.
This mechanical kit is in the form of:
z
z
90
a daughterboard which is mounted in place of the line termination A/,
a shield equipped with a 9-pin SUB D connector for connecting a bus X
TSX CBY••0K cable and a cable for connection to the daughterboard.
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks: functions
PLC station rack addressing
Introduction
Two cases can occur for PLC station rack addressing:
z
z
PLC station built from a standard rack (see Standard racks, p. 69),
PLC station built from extendable racks (see Extendable racks, p. 70).
Station built from
a standard rack
The station is always limited to a single rack, thus the rack address is implicit and
has a value of 0 (no microswitches).
Station built from
extendable racks
For each station rack an address must be assigned. This address is coded using 4
microswitches found on the rack.
Microswitches 1 to 3 are used to code the address of the rack on the bus X (0 to 7),
microswitch 4 is used to code two racks (4, 6 or 8 positions) on the same address.
This latter functionality is managed by the PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro software version V
3.3 or above.
ON position
Diagram showing the microswitch
Table of rack addresses
Rack addresses
Position of the
micro-switches
Note: On delivery, microswitches 1, 2 and 3 are in the ON position (address 0).
35011052.06 07/2008
91
TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks: functions
Assigning
addresses to
different racks
Address 0: this address is always assigned to the rack which supports:
z
z
the TSX P 57 processor physically,
the PCX 57 processor virtually.
This rack can be located in any position in the chain.
Addresses 1 to 7: they can be assigned in any order to all the other extendable
racks in the station.
Note: the rack address coding must be done before mounting the power supply
module.
CAUTION
Address conflict
Each rack must have a unique address other than address 0.
Power reset is required after address connection.
Failure to do so will result in the racks affected, as well as all their modules
showing a fault.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
This note only applies to racks with references TSX RKY..EX
If two or more racks are at address 0, the rack supporting the processor does not
show a fault.
Having correctly addressed the racks with faulty addresses, it is necessary to switch
off and switch on the rack concerned.
92
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks: functions
The principle of addressing two racks at the same address
Illustration
The following diagram shows the principle of addressing two racks at the same address.
1 single rack
TSX RKY 12EX
on the same
address
2 single racks
TSX RKY 8EX
on the same
address
2 racks
TSX RKY 6EX
on the same
address
Microswitch 4
2 racks
TSX RKY 4EX
on the same
address
Note: take into account the following notes:
z TSX RKY 12EX racks cannot have a second rack at the same address.
z TSX RKY 8EX/6EX/4EX racks can be intermixed.
z Two TSX RKY 8EX/6EX/4EX racks at the same address will not necessarily be
linked one after the other. The order of physical distribution is not important.
35011052.06 07/2008
93
TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks: functions
Module addresses
At a Glance
For all standard and extendable racks, the module address is geographical and will
depend upon the position of the module on the rack. The address of each position
is indicated under each connector - the connector with address PS is always
dedicated to the rack power supply.
Several addressing cases are possible:
z
z
module addressing on standard racks (see Standard racks, p. 69),
module addressing on extendable racks (see Extendable racks, p. 70).
Module
addressing on
standard racks
z
for a TSX RKY 6: use addresses 00 to 04,
for a TSX RKY 8: use addresses 00 to 06,
z for a TSX RKY 12: use addresses 00 to 10.
Module
addressing on
extendable racks
The address of a module will depend upon the position of microswitch 4:
z
microswitch 4 in the ON position, the modules will have addresses (00 to x),
according to the rack type,
z microswitch 4 in the OFF position, the modules will have addresses (08 to y),
according to the rack type. This functionality is only managed by the PL7 Junior
or PL7 Pro software version V 3.3 or above.
z
the following table shows the addresses in relation to the position of microswitch 4:
94
Position of microswitch 4
ON
OFF
TSX RKY 4EX racks
00 to 02
08 to 10
TSX RKY 6EX racks
00 to 04
08 to 12
TSX RKY 8EX racks
00 to 06
08 to 14
TSX RKY 12EX racks
00 to 10
unusable
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks: functions
Illustration
Diagram showing the module addresses on rack TSX RKY 8EX
Micro-switch 4
Module addresses
Note: the shaded addresses are only accessible using PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro
software version V 3.3 or above
35011052.06 07/2008
95
TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks: functions
Installing power supplies, processors and other modules
Installation on a
standard or
extendable rack
with address 0
and with a
Premium
processor
The rack with address 0 must have a power supply module and the processor
module. Premium PLCs have two types of power supply (standard format or double
format), the position of the processor will depend upon the type of power supply
used.
Using a standard format power supply module:
z
z
the power supply module automatically occupies position PS,
the single format processor module is installed in position 00 (preferred position)
or in position 01, if position 00 is unavailable.
Illustration
the double format processor module is installed in positions 00 and 01 (preferred
positions) or in positions 01 and 02, if position 00 is unavailable,
z other modules are installed starting from position 01, 02 or 03 depending on the
installation of the processor.
z
Illustration
Using a double format power supply module:
z
z
the power supply module automatically occupies position PS,
the single format processor module is always installed in position 01.
Illustration
96
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks: functions
z
z
the double format processor module is installed in positions 01 and 02,
other modules are installed starting from position 02 or 03 depending on the type
of processor.
Illustration
Installation on an
extendable rack
with address 0
and with an
Atrium
processor
The PCX 57 processor, which is built in to the PC, occupies a virtual position on the
rack with address 0. This virtual position should be unoccupied. Premium PLCs
have two types of power supply (standard and double format), the unoccupied
position will depend upon the type of power supply used.
Using a standard format power supply module:
the power supply module automatically occupies position PS,
position 00, the virtual slot for the processor, must be unoccupied,
z the other modules are installed starting at position 01.
z
z
Illustration
Using a double format power supply module:
the power supply module automatically occupies the positions PS and 00,
position 01, the virtual location of the processor, must be unoccupied,
z the other modules are installed starting from position 02.
z
z
Illustration
35011052.06 07/2008
97
TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks: functions
Installation on an
extendable rack
with address 1 to
7, regardless of
processor type
Each rack must be equipped with a power supply module, either standard or double
format.
Using a standard format power supply module:
z
z
the power supply module automatically occupies position PS,
the other modules are installed starting from position 00.
Illustration
Using a double format power supply module:
z
z
the power supply module automatically occupies positions PS and 00,
the other modules are installed starting at position 01.
Illustration
98
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX RKY Racks: accessories
8
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
The aim of this chapter is to show the different accessories which go with TSX RKY..
racks..
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
35011052.06 07/2008
Topic
Page
TSX CBY..0K bus X extension cable (II ≥ 02)
100
TSX CBY 1000 bus X extension cable
103
Line terminator TSX TLYEX
105
Positioning of line terminators on a station using a Premium processor
106
Positioning of line termination on a station using a Atrium processor
107
TSX RKA 02 protective cover for unoccupied positions
108
Labeling
109
Compatibility with the Installed Base
111
99
TSX RKY Racks: accessories
TSX CBY..0K bus X extension cable (II ≥ 02)
At a Glance
These cables of predetermined length are used to chain TSX RKY..EX extendable
racks and to transport the different bus X signals.
When a PCX 57 processor is used, they can also be used to connect the PC’s builtin processor and the first rack in the station.
They are equipped at each end with male 9-pin SUB D connectors, which connect
to the female 9-pin SUB D connector on the extendable rack or the PCX 57
processor.
Station with a TSX processor capable of being integrated in the rack
100
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX RKY Racks: accessories
Station with a PCX processor capable of being integrated in a PC
Important:
The cumulative length of all the cables used in a PLC station is limited to 100 meters
(328 feet).
CAUTION
Insertion and extraction under power
z
Insertion and extraction of a TSX CBY0K cable must only be done with all the
station’s elements switched off (racks, PC, etc.)
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
CAUTION
Minimum cable radius
z
The minimum bend radius of the bus X cable must be:
z 40 mm (1.57 in) for a static application,
z 80 mm (3.15 in) for a dynamic application.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
35011052.06 07/2008
101
TSX RKY Racks: accessories
Different cable
types available
102
To suit different users, several cable lengths are available.
Summary table of different cable types
Product reference
Lengths
TSX CBY 010K (II ≥ 02)
1 meter
TSX CBY 030K (II ≥ 02)
3 meters
TSX CBY 050K (II ≥ 02)
5 meters
TSX CBY 120K (II ≥ 02)
12 meters
TSX CBY 180K (II ≥ 02)
18 meters
TSX CBY 280K (II ≥ 02)
28 meters
TSX CBY 380K (II ≥ 02)
38 meters
TSX CBY 500K (II ≥ 02)
50 meters
TSX CBY 720K (II ≥ 02)
72 meters
TSX CBY 1000K (II ≥ 02)
100 meters
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX RKY Racks: accessories
TSX CBY 1000 bus X extension cable
At a Glance
For bus X lengths less than 100 meters but different from those available as cables
with connectors, always use a TSX CBY 1000 cable.
This cable must have TSX CBY K9 connectors fitted at both ends by the user. The
assembly procedure is described in the instructions supplied with the cable and the
connectors.
For implementation of these cables the following elements are required:
1 TSX CBY 1000 cable,
1 set of two TSX CBY K9 9-pin connectors,
z 1 TSX CBY ACC10 kit.
z
z
1 TSX CBY 1000
cable,
This cable must include one 100-meter reel of cable and two testers to check the
cable once the various connections have been made.
Illustration:
Reel
1 set of two TSX
CBY K9 9-pin
connectors
Testers
For each connector this set must include:
1 connector body,
1 set of contacts,
z 1 internal screening cap,
z 1 external screening cap,
z 1 ferrule,
z 1 plastic cover with 2 fixing screws.
z
z
Illustration:
35011052.06 07/2008
103
TSX RKY Racks: accessories
1 TSX CBY
ACC10 kit
This kit includes:
z
z
2 crimping tools,
a contact extractor to be used in case of errors.
Illustration:
Crimping tools
104
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX RKY Racks: accessories
Line terminator TSX TLYEX
Introduction
When extendable racks (see TSX RKY.. standard and extendable racks: functions,
p. 85) are used, the bus X must be fitted with a line terminator at each end.
At a Glance
A line terminator is made up of a 9-pin SUB D connector and a cover containing the
adaptation components. It is mounted on the 9-pin SUB D 9 connector belonging to
the extendable rack at the end of the line.
Illustration:
TSX TLYEX line terminations are sold in twos and marked A/ and /B. The bus must
be fitted with a terminator A/ at one end and a terminator /B at the other end in no
predefined (see Positioning of line terminators on a station using a Premium
processor, p. 106) order.
CAUTION
Insertion or extraction of terminator under power
Insertion or extraction of a line terminator must only be done with all the station’s
racks switched off.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
35011052.06 07/2008
105
TSX RKY Racks: accessories
Positioning of line terminators on a station using a Premium processor
Positioning on a
PLC station
containing
several TSX
RKY..EX
extendable racks
Diagram showing the principle:
Positioning on a
PLC station
containing a
single TSX
RKY..EX
extendable rack
Diagram showing the principle:
Note: When a single extendable rack is used, a line terminator must always be
mounted on each of the rack’s 9-pin SUB D connectors.
106
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX RKY Racks: accessories
Positioning of line termination on a station using a Atrium processor
At a Glance
At manufacture, the equivalent of the line terminator /A is built in to the processor
and, due to this, the processor forms a termination of the bus X. The extendable rack
located at the end of the chain therefore must always have a TSX TLY EX line
terminator labeled /B fitted on its unused 9-pin SUB D connector.
Principle diagram:
PC
PCX57
OK NOK
Special case.
When no devices are connected to the bus X, the TSX TLYEX line terminator /B
must be installed on the bus X connector of the PCX 57 processor.
Illustration:
PCX57
35011052.06 07/2008
OK NOK
107
TSX RKY Racks: accessories
TSX RKA 02 protective cover for unoccupied positions
At a Glance
If a position on a rack is unoccupied, it is advisable to mount a TSX RKA 02 cover
designed for this in this position.
This cover is mounted and fixed on the rack like a module with a reduced depth.
TSX RKA 02 covers are sold in indivisible quantities of five.
Illustration
108
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX RKY Racks: accessories
Labeling
Labeling of
module
positions on the
rack
When the module is in place on the rack, it masks the address of the position, which
is printed on the rack.
Due to this and in order to be able to identify the module’s position quickly, each rack
is delivered with a page of sticky labels which allow you to label the position of each
module.
This sticky label is stuck on the upper part of the module when it is in place on the
rack.
Illustration: example of processor module labeling
Label position
Page of labels:
35011052.06 07/2008
PS
00
01
020
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
109
TSX RKY Racks: accessories
Rack labeling
Each rack is delivered with a set of snap out labels so that for each rack you can
label:
z
z
the address of the rack in the station,
the network address of the station when the station is connected to a
communication network.
Therefore each rack has two slots where these addresses can be placed.
Illustration:
Network address
of the station
Rack address
in station
110
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX RKY Racks: accessories
Compatibility with the Installed Base
Summary Table
This table shows the compatibility with the installed base in relation to old and new
references:
Configuration already in place with
New
references
Previous references
New references
Development of the configuration
Previous references
TSX RKY..E
TSX CBY..OK (••
01)
TSX TLY (•• 01)
TSX RKY..E
TSX CBY..OK (••
01)
TSX TLY A+B (••
03)
TSX RKY..E
TSX CBY..OK (••
02)
TSX CBY 1000
TSX TLY A+B (••
03)
TSX RKY..EX
TSX CBY..OK (••
02)
TSX CBY 1000
TSX TLYEX A/+/B
2 terminators
TSX TLY (•• 01)
YES
NO (1)
NO (1)
NO (3)
TSX CBY..OK
cables (•• 01)
YES
YES
NO (2)
NO (4)
Terminators
TSX TLY A+B (••
03)
YES
YES
YES
NO (3)
TSX RKY..E
rack(s)
YES
YES
YES
NO (5)
TSX CBY..OK (••
02) or CBY 1000
cable(s)
YES
YES
YES
YES
TSX RKY..EX
rack(s)
NO (6)
YES
YES
YES
Terminators
TSX TLYEX A/+/B
YES
YES
YES
YES
Details of incompatibilities:
1. Operation correct but incorrect detection of bus X break. Behavior of outputs not
guaranteed for bus break.
2. Correct operation for 50 instead of 100 meters. Correct detection of bus X break.
35011052.06 07/2008
111
TSX RKY Racks: accessories
3. Incorrect bus adaptation, no guarantee of operation. The TLY and TLY A/B adapt
the signals in relation to 0V (wire in the bus X cable). The TLY EX A/B adapt the
signals in relation to the shielding.
4. Incorrect detection of duplicate address.
5. Operation correct but no detection of duplicate address.
6. Incorrect bus adaptation. TLY EX plugs required for correct operation when a
TSXRKY..EX. is used in the configuration.
Note: In a PLC station, the TSX TLY line terminator torque must be of the same
index.
•• corresponds to the product version.
112
35011052.06 07/2008
Ventilation module
9
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
This Chapter deals with the ventilation module and its installation.
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
35011052.06 07/2008
Topic
Page
Ventilation module: general introduction
114
Ventilation module: physical description
116
Ventilation module: dimensions
117
Ventilation module: mounting
118
Rules for installing racks fitted with ventilation modules
120
Ventilation Module: Connections
121
Ventilation module: characteristics
123
113
Ventilation module
Ventilation module: general introduction
At a Glance
The ventilation modules which are installed above the TSX P57/TSX H57 PLC
station racks force air convection in order to make uniform the ambient temperature
inside the casing and thus eliminate the various hot spots which may exist.
Note: A temperature probe built into each module informs the user when the
ambient temperature has reached its maximum value.
ventilation module:
Use of ventilation
modules
114
The use of these modules is recommended in the following cases:
Ambient temperature in the 25°C...60°C range: the life of the various
components of the Premium PLC is increased (MTBF increased by 25%).
z Ambient temperature in the 60°C...0.70°C range: the ambient temperature
being limited to 60°C without ventilation, forced ventilation makes it possible to
lower the temperature inside the modules by 10°C, which brings the internal
temperature of the modules back to the equivalent of 60°C at ambient
temperature.
z
35011052.06 07/2008
Ventilation module
Different module
types
Three ventilation modules are available, adapted to the main supply networks:
ventilation module with 24 VDC, 110 VAC or 220 VAC power supply.
According to the rack modularity (4, 6, 8 or 12 positions), 1, 2 or 3 ventilation
modules are to be fitted above each rack:
12-position racks TSX RKY 12/12EX: 3 ventilation modules,
8-position racks TSX RKY 8/8EX: 2 ventilation modules,
z 4 and 6-position racks TSX RKY 4EX/6/6EX: 1 ventilation module.
z
z
Illustration:
TSX RKY 12/12EX
TSX RKY 8/8EX
TSX RKY 4EX/6/6EX
35011052.06 07/2008
115
Ventilation module
Ventilation module: physical description
Illustration
Descriptive diagram:
Table of labels
This table gives you descriptions according to the labels:
Label
1
Description
Terminal block for connecting:
z the module power supply,
z the supply for the temperature probe and the associated LED or pre-
actuator. Each terminal can receive one 1.5 mm2 (14 AWG) wire without a
wire end ferrule, or two 1 mm2 (16 AWG) wires with wire end ferrules.
116
2
Terminal for connecting the module to the ground.
3
Holes for fixing the module (M4 x 12 screws). If these modules are used with
Premium PLCs, the ventilation modules must be fixed on an AM1-ED ... 35 x
15 mounting rail .
4
Louvered slats which send air to the front.
35011052.06 07/2008
Ventilation module
Ventilation module: dimensions
Ventilation
module alone
Illustrative diagram (dimensions in millimeters):
Rear view
Ventilation
module + rack
Right-hand view
Front view
Illustrative diagram (dimensions in millimeters):
(1) with screw terminal block module,
(2) maximum depth for all types of modules and their associated connectors.
Characteristics table:
35011052.06 07/2008
Racks
Number of positions
a
TSX RKY 4EX
4
187.9 mm
TSX RKY 6/6EX
6
261.6 mm
TSX RKY 8/8EX
8
335.3 mm
TSX RKY 12/12EX
12
482.6 mm
117
Ventilation module
Ventilation module: mounting
General points
The ventilation modules associated with Premium PLC’s must be mounted on 35mm
wide and 15mm deep mounting rails (type AM1-ED...) in order to compensate for the
thickness of the rack (see mounting and fixing racks, p. 81).
Diagram:
Support
Mounting rail
35x15
Ventilation module
Premium PLC
118
35011052.06 07/2008
Ventilation module
Mounting
position
Mounting position for ventilation modules according to rack-type:
6 position racks (TSX RKY 6/6EX)
12 position racks (TSX RKY 12/12EX)
35011052.06 07/2008
8 position racks (TSX RKY 8/8EX)
4 position racks (TSX RKY 4EX)
119
Ventilation module
Rules for installing racks fitted with ventilation modules
Illustration
Principle diagram: see Installing Racks, p. 78
a = 50 mm
b = 30 mm
1 Installation or casing.
2 Trough or cable tray.
120
35011052.06 07/2008
Ventilation module
Ventilation Module: Connections
Connection of
the Ventilation
Module Power
Supply
Illustration:
Note: When using several ventilation modules of the same type, use a common
power supply for all the ventilation modules.
35011052.06 07/2008
121
Ventilation module
Connection of
the Temperature
Probe Power
Supply
The Temperature probe may be supplied either by a direct current or alternating
current and be connected to a LED indicator, a PLC input, etc. .
Diagram:
Direct current supply
Alternating current supply
Note: When using several ventilation modules, the probe contacts shall be
serialized.
Illustration:
Ventilation module 1
Ventilation module 2
Ventilation module 3
(1) direct 24/28 V or alternating 110/220 V
122
35011052.06 07/2008
Ventilation module
Ventilation module: characteristics
Table of
Characteristics
Table of ventilation module characteristics:
Reference
TSX FAN D2 P
TSX FAN A4P
TSX FAN A5P
Nominal
24 VDC
110 VAC
220 VAC
Limit
20..27.6 VDC
90120 VAC
180260 VAC
Current consumed at nominal
voltage
180 mA
180 mA
100 mA
Temperature
probe
direct 24/28 VDC or alternating 110/220 VAC
Supply voltage
Power supply
voltage
Outage
1 A at 24 VDC / 10,000 operations
power (on
1 A at 48 VDC / 30,000 operations
resistive load) 1 A at 110 VDC / 30,000 operations
0.5 A at 220 VDC / 10,000 operations
Deactivation
Temperature>= 75°C +/- 5°C
Status
0.5 A at 220 VDC / 10,000 operations
Temperature>= 75°C +/- 5°C
No. of modules per rack
z 1 module on 4 and 6-position racks (TSX RKY 4EX/6/6EX),
z 2 modules on 8-position racks (TSX RKY 8/8EX),
z 3 modules on 12-position racks (TSX RKY 12/12EX).
35011052.06 07/2008
123
Ventilation module
124
35011052.06 07/2008
X-Bus extension module
10
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
The aim of this Chapter is to introduce the X-Bus extension module and its
installation.
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
35011052.06 07/2008
Topic
Page
Bus X extension module: introduction
126
Rack Extender Module: physical description
128
Bus X extension module: installation
129
Bus X extension module: configuration
133
Bus X extension module: maximum distances according to module type
134
Bus X extension modules: connections
138
Bus X extension module: diagnostics
140
Topology of a PLC station with extension module
142
Managing a power supply module fitted with an bus X extension module
144
125
X-Bus extension module
Bus X extension module: introduction
General
The Premium PLC bus X makes it possible to connect 8 racks with 12 positions
(TSX RKY 12EX) or 16 racks with 4, 6 or 8 positions (TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX),
distributed along a maximum length of 100 meters.
If applications require greater distances between racks, the bus X extension module
(TSX REY 200) makes it possible to greatly increase this distance whilst maintaining
the characteristics and performance which are inherent in a PLC station which is
only made up of a single bus X segment without extension module.
The system consists of:
an bus X extension module (TSX REY 200) called "Master" located on the rack
with address 0 (rack supporting the processor) and on the main bus X segment.
This module has two channels which allow the two bus X segments to be
extended up to a maximum distance of 250 meters,
z one or two TSX REY 200 modules called "Slave", each located on a rack on the
extended bus segments,
z each of the slave modules is connected to the master module by a
TSX CBRY 2500 cable fitted with TSX CBRY K5 connectors.
z
126
35011052.06 07/2008
X-Bus extension module
Example of
topology
Illustration:
Remote X bus segment
Main X bus segment
X bus
Remote X Bus
≤ 100m
TSX REY 200
Master
≤ 250m
slave
TSX REY 200
X
≤100m
Processor
≤ 250m
Remote X Bus
TSX REY 200
slave
X bus
≤ 100m
Remote X bus segment
Module
consumption
35011052.06 07/2008
Consumption on 5VDC power supply: 500 mA
Dissipated power: 2.5 W.
127
X-Bus extension module
Rack Extender Module: physical description
Illustration
Descriptive diagram:
Table of labels
Description table according to number:
Label
128
Description
1
Display block made up of 6 LEDs:
z RUN LED: indicates the operating status of the module,
z ERR LED: indicates an error within the module,
z I/O LED: indicates an error external to the module,
z MST LED: indicates the status of the master or slave function of the module,
z CH0 LED: indicates the operating status of channel 0,
z CH1 LED: indicates the operating status of channel 1,
2
Connector for linking channel 0 of the module.
3
Connector for linking channel 1 of the module.
35011052.06 07/2008
X-Bus extension module
Bus X extension module: installation
Introduction
There are several different cases when installing an bus X extension module:
installation of a master module on the TSX P57 station,
installation of a master module on the PCX 57 station,
z installation of a slave module.
z
z
Installation of a
master module
on the TSX P57
station
The master module must be installed:
on the rack which supports the processor (rack with address 00), this rack being
located on the main bus X segment,
z in any position on this rack apart from those positions which are dedicated to the
power supply and processor modules.
z
Constraint:
the 00 position of rack with address 0 is prohibited to all modules including the
processor module, only a double format power supply is allowed to occupy this
position.
The table below indicates the various scenarios according to the format of the power
supply module and the processor:
Scenario
Illustration
Rack with address 0 with single format power
supply module and processor:
z power supply module in position PS,
z processor must be in position 01,
z position 00 is always unoccupied,
z TSX REY 200 module in one of the available
positions in the rack.
Rack with address 0 with double format power
supply module and single format processor:
z power supply module in positions PS and 00,
z processor must be in position 01,
z TSX REY 200 module in one of the available
positions in the rack.
35011052.06 07/2008
129
X-Bus extension module
Scenario
Illustration
Address rack 0 with single format power supply
module and double format processor:
z power supply module in position PS,
z processor must be in positions 01 and 02,
z position 00 is always unoccupied,
z TSX REY 200 module in one of the available
positions in the rack.
Rack with address 0 with double format power
supply module and processor:
z power supply module in positions PS and 00,
z processor must be in positions 01 and 02,
z TSX REY 200 module in one of the available
positions in the rack.
130
35011052.06 07/2008
X-Bus extension module
Installing a
master module
on a PCX 57
station
As with a TSX P57 station, the master module must be installed:
on the rack which supports the processor virtually (rack with address 0), this rack
being located on the main bus X segment,
z in any position on this rack apart from the position dedicated to the power supply
module and that which is virtually occupied by the processor.
z
Constraint:
The 00 position of the rack with address 0 is prohibited to all modules, only a double
format power supply module is allowed to occupy this position. The virtual position
of the processor (unoccupied position) must always be position 01.
The table below indicates the various scenarios according to the format of the power
supply module and the processor:
Scenario
Illustration
Rack with address 0 with single format power
supply:
z power supply module in position PS,
z virtual position of the processor must be position 01
(position always unoccupied),
z position 00 is always unoccupied,
z TSX REY 200 module in one of the available
positions in the rack.
Rack with address 0 with double format power
supply module:
z power supply module in position PS,
z virtual position of the processor must be position 01
(position always unoccupied),
z TSX REY 200 module in one of the available
positions in the rack.
35011052.06 07/2008
131
X-Bus extension module
Installation of a
slave module
The slave module can be installed on one of the racks of the bus extension segment
and in any position on this rack apart from the one which is dedicated to the power
supply module.
The table below indicates the various scenarios according to the format of the power
supply module and the processor:
Scenario
Illustration
Rack with address 0 with single format power
supply:
z power supply module in position PS,
z TSX REY 200 module in one of the available
positions in the rack.
Rack with address 0 with double format power
supply module:
z power supply module in positions PS and 00,
z TSX REY 200 module in one of the available
positions in the rack.
132
35011052.06 07/2008
X-Bus extension module
Bus X extension module: configuration
General points
The configuration of the module as a master or slave is automatic:
if the module is installed on the rack with address 0, it will automatically be
declared as master,
z if the module is installed on a rack with an address other than 0, it will
automatically be declared as slave.
z
Note: If 2 racks are declared at address 0, the master module must be located on
the rack supporting the "low" module addresses, as indicated in the figure below.
"Low" module addresses:
z addresses 0 to 6 on TSX RKY 8EX,
z addresses 0 to 4 on TSX RKY 6EX,
z addresses 0 to 2 on rack TSX RKY 4EX,
Illustration
Example: 2 TSX RKY 8EX racks at address 0.
Microswitch 4
located on the rack
Note: If two racks are declared at address 0, the rack supporting the "high" address
modules cannot receive a slave extension module.
"High" address modules:
z addresses 8 to 14 on rack TSX RKY 8EX,
z addresses 8 to 12 on rack TSX RKY 6EX,
z addresses 8 to 10 on rack TSX RKY 4EX.
35011052.06 07/2008
133
X-Bus extension module
Bus X extension module: maximum distances according to module type
General points
The figure below summarizes the maximum distances authorized for the different
bus X segments and bus X extensions:
z
z
for each bus X segment (X1, X2 or X3): maximum length 100 meters,
for each bus X extension (XD1 or XD2): maximum length 250 meters,
Illustration:
Main bus X segment (X2)
Main bus X segment (X1)
Remote bus X ≤ 250m
XD1
Bus X
Bus X
≤ 100m
<= 100 m
TSX REY 200
Slave
Master
TSX REY 200
Bus X
≤ 100m
TSX REY 200
Slave
Processor
XD2
Remote bus X ≤ 250m
Bus X
≤ 100m
Main bus X segment (X3)
Taking this into account, the maximum distance possible between the processor and
the remote modules is 350 meters.
This distance of 350 meters is only possible for single discrete input/output modules.
The following illustrations indicate the restrictions in relation to module type.
Note: Extension is prohibited for communication modules TSX SCY •••/TSX
ETY•••/TSX IBY •••/TSX PBY •••. These modules must be located on the main
segment of the bus X1
134
35011052.06 07/2008
X-Bus extension module
Safety and single
discrete I/O
modules
Illustration:
≤ 350m
≤ 250
Bus X
≤ 100m
Single discrete I/O modules:
TSX DEY.../TSX DSY...
and TSX PAY… safety modules
Exception: TSX DEY 16FK
35011052.06 07/2008
135
X-Bus extension module
Mixed discrete I/
O, analog,
applicationspecific and bus
sensor/actuator
modules
Illustration:
≤ 175 m
Modules:
TSX DMY… discrete mixed and TSX DEY 16FK
discrete single,
TSX AEY.../TSX ASY... analog,
TSX ISPY.../TSX CTY...TSX CAY.../TSX
CFY…applications
TSX SAY 100 bus sensors/actuators.
Bus X
≤ 100m
≤ 175 m
Note: for the following modules:
z TSX DEY 16 FK with PV index≥ 06,
z TSX DMY 28FK / 28RFK,
z TSX AEY 810/1614,
z TSX ASY 410 with PV index ≥ 11,
z TSX ASY 800,
z TSX CTY 2C
z TSX CAY 22/42/33,
maximum distance authorized (extension cable and bus X cable length): 225
meters.
136
35011052.06 07/2008
X-Bus extension module
Communication
modules
CAUTION
Specific modules on extension prohibited
The following modules must be located on the main bus X segment.
z TSX SCY... communication
z TSX ETY... network
z TSX IBY... /TSX PBY field bus
Do not locate them on bus X extensions
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
Illustration:
Modules:
TSX SCY… communication
TSX ETY... network
TSX IBY…/TSX PBY field bus
NO
Extension prohibited!
35011052.06 07/2008
137
X-Bus extension module
Bus X extension modules: connections
General points
To extend the bus X, you must use:
z
z
the kit TSX CBRY 2500 made up of a reel of cable, 250 meters in length,
the set of connectors TSX CBRY K5.
You must fit the cable with connectors at both ends. The procedure for mounting the
connectors on the cable is described in the instructions supplied with the set of
connectors TSX CBRT K5.
Connecting
accessories
Installing an bus X extension requires, therefore, the following elements:
1 TSX CBRY 2500 kit including 1 cable, 250 meters
long, supplied on a reel.
1 set of 5 connectors TSX CBRY K5, which allows you
to fit 2 extension cables, leaving you with one
connector as a spare.
138
35011052.06 07/2008
X-Bus extension module
Connecting
principles
Illustration:
Main bus X segment
Remote bus X segment
Channel 0
Remote bus X (XD2) ≤ 250m
TSX REY 200
Master
TSX CBRY 2500+TSX CBRY K5
(Cable + connector)
Channel 0
TSX REY 200
Slave
Channel 1
Channel 0
TSX REY 200
Slave
Processor
Remote bus X (XD2) ≤ 250m
TSX CBRY 2500+TSX CBRY K5
(Cable + connector)
Remote bus X segment
Note: Each bus X segment must have a A/ and B/ line terminator (see Line
terminator TSX TLYEX, p. 105)at each end.
35011052.06 07/2008
139
X-Bus extension module
Bus X extension module: diagnostics
By signaling
LEDs
The TSX REY 200 module display panel, located on the front panel of the module,
is used for diagnostics on the extension system.
Illustration: display panel
Module
functioning as
master
(positioned on
the rack with
address 00)
Diagnostics table:
LED status
Module status
Comments
ERR
RUN
Mst
I/O
CH0
CH1
F
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Fault
No
communication
with the processor
Off
On
On
Off
On
Off
OK
Channel 0 active
Channel 1 inactive
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
OK
Channel 0 inactive
Channel 1 active
Off
On
On
Off
On
On
OK
Channel 0 active
Channel 1 active
Off
On
On
On
Off
Off
Fault
Channel 0 inactive
Channel 1 inactive
Legend:
On: on
Off: switched off
F: flashing
N/A: Not applicable
140
35011052.06 07/2008
X-Bus extension module
Module
functioning as
slave (positioned
on a rack with
address other
than 00)
Diagnostics table:
LED status
Module status
Comments
ERR
RUN
Mst
I/O
CH0
CH1
F
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Fault
No
communication
with the
processors
Off
On
Off
Off
On
Off
OK
Channel 0 active
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Off
Fault
Channel 0
inactive
Legend:
On: on
Off: switched off
F: flashing
N/A: not determined
35011052.06 07/2008
141
X-Bus extension module
Topology of a PLC station with extension module
TSX P57 station
Illustration:
Main bus X segment
Segment 1 of remote bus X
Bus X
Remote bus X ≤ 250 m
≤ 100m
TSX REY 200
Master
TSX REY 200
Slave
Bus X
≤ 100m
TSX REY 200
Slave
Processor
Remote bus X ≤ 250 m
Bus X
≤ 100m
Segment 2 of remote bus X
Maximum station capacity:
With TSX P57 10 processors:
z 2 TSX RKY 12 EX racks,
z 4 TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks.
z With TSX P57 20/30/40 processors:
z 8 TSX RKY 12 EX racks,
z 16 TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks.
z
142
35011052.06 07/2008
X-Bus extension module
PCX 57 station
Illustration:
Main bus X segment
Segment 1 of remote bus X
Bus X
Remote bus X ≤ (250m-X1)
Host PC
≤ 100m
TSX REY 200
TSX REY 200
Slave
Master
PCX 57 processor
Bus X
Bus X L =
L=X1
TSX REY 200
Virtual position of the processor
Remote bus X ≤ (250m-X1)
Slave
Bus X
≤ 100m
Segment 2 of remote bus X
Main bus X segment
Maximum station capacity:
With TSX P57 10 processors:
z 2 TSX RKY 12 EX racks,
z 4 TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks.
z With TSX P57 30 processors:
z 8 TSX RKY 12 EX racks,
z 16 TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks.
z
Note: In every case, the length of bus X extension segments is defined in relation
to the location of the processor. This maximum distance is 250 meters (820 feet).
In the special case of the PCX 57 processor, when it is located in the PC, the
extension distance of the bus X segments in relation to the rack with address 0, is
equal to 250 meters minus the distance (X1) between the processor and rack with
address 0. Main bus X segment = (X1+X2) ≤ 100 meters (328 feet).
35011052.06 07/2008
143
X-Bus extension module
Managing a power supply module fitted with an bus X extension module
General
CAUTION
Use of a extension module
If an bus X extension module (TSX REY 200) is used in an instalation, all the racks
configured in the application must be connected, powered and functioning when
managing the software application.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
Note: All use of an bux X extension module (TSX REY 200) in an installation
makes management of the installation or the machine subject to all the racks
configured in the application being present.
In order to do this, an application check must be carried out to make sure that all
the application racks are present by testing the bit %MWxy MOD 2 X6 (explicit
exchanges) on at least one module on each rack. This test allows the racks to be
cleared of all incorrect declarations in the rack addressing and, in particular, if two
racks bear the same address by mistake.
This test only comes into play after the installation has completely restarted
(switched on, installation modified, processor RESET, configuration changed).
144
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 Premium
processors
III
At a Glance
Subject of this
Part
35011052.06 07/2008
The aim of this part is to describe the Premium TSX P57/TSX H57 processors and
their installation.
145
TSX P57/TSX H57 Premium processors
What's in this
Part?
146
This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter
Chapter Name
Page
11
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: introduction
147
12
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: installation
157
13
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
177
14
TSX P57 103 processor
211
15
TSX P57 153 processor
213
16
TSX P57 203 processor
215
17
TSX P57 253 processor
217
18
TSX P57 2623 processor
219
19
TSX P57 2823 processor
223
20
TSX P57 303 processor
227
21
TSX P57 303A processor
229
22
TSX P57 353 processor
233
23
TSX P57 353A processor
235
24
TSX P57 353LA Processor
239
25
TSX P57 3623 processor
243
26
TSX P57 3623A processor
247
27
TSX P57 453 processor
251
28
TSX P57 453A processor
253
29
TSX P57 4823 processor
257
30
TSX P57 4823A processor
261
31
Premium TSX P57/TSX H57 processor: general characteristics
265
32
Processor performance
271
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors:
introduction
11
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
The aim of this chapter is to introduce the TSX P57/TSX H57 processors.
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
35011052.06 07/2008
Topic
Page
General Introduction
148
Physical Description of TSX P57 Processors
150
Real-time clock
153
147
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: introduction
General Introduction
Introduction
A wide range of TSX P57 processors of different levels of performance and
specifications are available to meet your various requirements.
General Points
TSX P57 sequential processors can be integrated into TSX RKY... racks (see
Standard and extendable TSX RKY racks, p. 68).
List of TSX P57 processors:
TSX P57 103, TSX P57 153,
TSX P57 203, TSX P57 253, TSX P57 2623, TSX P57 2823,
z TSX P57 303, TSX P57 303A, TSX P57 353, TSX P57 353LA, TSX P57 353A,
TSX P57 3623, TSX P57 3623A,
z TSX P57 453, TSX P57 453A, TSX P57 4823, TSX P57 4823A.
z
z
Note: Processors from families 20, 30 and 40 have built-in process control
functions.
Illustration
148
TSX P57 standard format in TSX RKY 6EX rack:
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: introduction
Functions
Premium TSX P57 processors manage a complete PLC station which is made up of:
discrete input/output modules,
analog input/output modules,
z application-specific modules (i.e. counting, axis control, step by step control,
communication, etc.),
z
z
which can be distributed over one or more racks connected to the bus X.
The application is designed using PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro running Windows. This
offers:
four programming languages: Grafcet, Ladder, Structured Text and List,
a multitask software structure: Master, Fast, Event processing,
z a change function for programs being executed,
z etc.
z
z
Table of TSX P57
Processors
All processors in the TSX P57 range can be found in the following table.
Type
Physical
format
Maximum
number of
discrete I/Os
Maximum
memory size
Built-in master
FIPIO link
Built-in Ethernet
link
TSX P57 103
Single
512
96K16
-
-
TSX P57 153
Single
512
96K16
X
-
TSX P57 353LA
Single
1024
96K16
X
-
TSX P57 203
Double
1024
208K16
-
-
TSX P57 253
Double
1024
224K16
X
-
TSX P57 2623
Double
1024
208K16
-
X
TSX P57 2823
Double
1024
224K16
X
X
TSX P57 303/303A
Double
1024
464K16
-
-
TSX P57 353/353A
Double
1024
480K16
X
-
TSX P57 3623/
3623A
Double
1024
464K16
-
X
TSX P57 453/453A
Double
2048
688K16
X
-
TSX P57 4823/
4823A
Double
2048
688K16
X
X
Legend:
X: available.
-: unavailable.
35011052.06 07/2008
149
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: introduction
Physical Description of TSX P57 Processors
Illustration
These diagrams label the different components of a TSX P57 processor module in
standard format:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Standard format processor:
TSX P57 103 / 153
150
Standard format processor:
TSX P57 353LA
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: introduction
These diagrams label the different components of a TSX P57 processor module in
double format:
9
1
2
3
4
8
5
6
7
Double format processor:
TSX P57 203/253/303/303A/353
TSX P57 353A/453/453A
35011052.06 07/2008
Double format processors with on-board
Ethernet: TSX P57 2623/2823/3623/3623A/
4823/4823A
151
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: introduction
Description
This table describes the components of a processor module
Number
Function
1
Display panel containing four or five LEDs.
2
Recessed RESET button which when pressed causes a cold startup.
z Processor working normally: cold startup in STOP or RUN mode,
depending on the procedure defined at configuration.
z Processor error: forced startup in STOP mode.
3
Terminal port (TER Connector (8-pin mini-DIN)):
this is used to connect an FTX type or PC compatible terminal, or to connect the
PLC to the UNI-TELWAY bus through the TSX P ACC 01 insulation unit. This
connector is used to supply 5V to the peripheral which is linked to it (limited by
the available current provided by the power supply).
4
Terminal port (AUX Connector (8-pin mini-DIN)):
this is used to connect a peripheral with its own power supply (terminal, operator
dialog console or printer (no voltage is supplied to this connector)).
5
Slot for a type 1 PCMCIA memory extension card.
If there is no memory card, this slot is fitted with a cover which must be kept in
place; as the processor will stop if it is removed.
6
Slot for a type 3 PCMCIA card. This slot can accept either of the following:
z a memory extension card,
z a communication card allowing the processor to be connected to a FIPWAY,
FIPIO Agent, UNI-TELWAY or serial link communication channel.
If there is no card, this slot is fitted with a cover.
7
9-pin SUB D connector for connecting a FIPIO bus master. This connector is
only present on TSX P57 •53 processors.
8
RJ 45 connector for connecting to the Ethernet network. This connector is only
present on TSX P57 •23 processors.
9
The ETY PORT display panel comprising 6 LEDs.
Note: The (TER) and (AUX) connectors propose master UNI-TELWAY
communication mode at 19200 bauds by default and can be configured for slave
UNI-TELWAY or ASCII character mode.
152
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: introduction
Real-time clock
At a Glance
Each processor (TSX P57 or PCX 57) has a savable real-time clock which manages:
z
z
the current date and time,
the date and time of when the application last stopped.
The date and time are managed even when the processor is switched off, on
condition that:
the TSX P57 processor is mounted on the rack with its power supply module in
place and is equipped with a back-up battery,
z the PCX 57 processor is equipped with a back-up battery.
z
Current date and
time
the processor keeps the current date and time up to date in the system words
%SW49 to %SW53. This data is coded in BCD.
System words
Most significant byte
Least significant byte
%SW49
00
Days of the week from 1 to 7
(1 for Monday and 7 for Sunday)
%SW50
Seconds (0 to 59)
00
%SW51
Hours (0 to 23)
Minutes (0 to 59)
%SW52
Month (1 to 12)
Days of the month (1 to 31)
%SW53
Century (0 to 99)
Year (0 to 99)
Note: %SW49 is read-only.
35011052.06 07/2008
153
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: introduction
Accessing the
date and time
The date and time can be accessed:
z
z
via the processor debug screen,
via the program:
z read: system words %SW49 to %SW53, if the system bit %S50 = 0,
z immediate update: write system words %SW50 to %SW53, if the system bit
%S50 = 1,
z incremental update: the system word %SW59 is used to change the date
and time, field by field, from the current value, if the system bit %S59 = 1, or is
used to carry out a global increment/decrement.
Bit value table:
bit0 = 1 globally increments of the days of bit8 = 1 globally decrements of the days of the
the week from 1 to 7 (1 for Monday 7 for week from 1 to 7 (1 for Monday 7 for Sunday)
Sunday)
bit1 =1, increments the seconds
bit9 =1, decrements the seconds
bit2 =1, increments the minutes
bit10 =1, decrements the minutes
bit3 =1, increments the hours
bit11 =1, decrements the hours
bit4 =1, increments the days
bit12 =1, decrements the days
bit5 =1, increments the months
bit13 =1, decrements the months
bit6 =1, increments the years
bit14 =1, decrements the years
bit7 =1, increments the centuries
bit15 =1, decrements the centuries
(1) all fields are updated.
Note: The processor does not automatically manage the change between winter
and summer time.
154
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: introduction
The date and
time of when the
application last
stopped
The date and time of when the application last stopped are stored in BCD in the
system words %SW54 to %SW58.
System words
Most significant byte
Least significant byte
%SW54
Seconds (0 to 59)
00
%SW55
Hours (0 to 23)
Minutes (0 to 59)
%SW56
Month (1 to 12)
Days of the month (1 to 31)
%SW57
Century (0 to 99)
Year (0 to 99)
%SW58
Day of the week (from 1 to 7) Reason for the last application stop
to access the date and time of the last application stop:
read the system words %SW54 to %SW58,
z to find the reason for the last application stop:
read the least significant byte of the system word %SW58 (value saved in BCD).
z
Table of %SW58 system words:
35011052.06 07/2008
%SW58 = 1
application switched to STOP mode,
%SW58 = 2
application stopped due to a software error,
%SW58 = 4
power outage or power supply RESET button has been pressed
%SW58 = 5
stop due to hardware fault
%SW58 = 6
application stopped due to HALT instruction
155
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: introduction
156
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors:
installation
12
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
This Chapter deals with the installation of TSX P57/TSX H57 processor modules
and the PCMCIA extension card.
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
35011052.06 07/2008
Topic
Page
Positioning of the processor module
158
How to mount processor modules
161
Mounting/Removing a PCMCIA Memory Extension Card on a TSX P57
Processor
164
Processing on Insertion/Extraction of a PCMCIA Memory Card on a Premium
PLC
167
Standard and Backup Memory Cards for PLCs
168
Application + Files Type Memory Cards
171
File Type Memory Card: TSX MRP F 004M Replaces Card TSX MRP DS
2048 P
174
Correspondence Table
175
157
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: installation
Positioning of the processor module
Introduction
You may face two possible scenarios when positioning a processor module on a
rack:
z
z
158
positioning of a standard format processor module,
positioning of a double format processor module.
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: installation
Positioning of a
standard format
processor
module
A standard format processor module is always installed on the TSX RKY.. rack with
address 0 and in position 00 or 01 depending on whether the rack is equipped with
a standard format or double format supply module.
Rack with standard format supply module: TSX PSY 2600/1610.
In this case, the processor module shall be installed in position 00 (preferred
position) or position 01, in the latter case, position 00 should not be occupied.
Illustration
Rack with double format supply module: TSX PSY 3610/5500/5520/8500.
In this case, as the supply module occupies two positions (PS and 00), the
processor shall be installed in position 01.
Illustration
Note: If the CPU is intended to replace an ATRIUM module in your PLC
configuration, make sure that the surplus electrical consumption on the rack which
is caused by this modification does not lead to the replacement of your power
supply module by a more powerful module.
35011052.06 07/2008
159
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: installation
Positioning of a
double format
processor
module
A double format processor module is always installed on the TSX RKY.. rack with
address 0 and in position 00 and 01 or 01 and 02 depending on whether the rack is
equipped with a standard format or double format supply module.
Rack with standard format supply module: TSX PSY 2600/1610 .
In this case, the processor module shall be installed in position 00 and 01 (preferred
position) or position 01 and 02, in the latter case, position 00 should not be occupied.
Illustration
Rack with double format supply module: TSX PSY 3610/5500/5520/8500 .
In this case, as the supply module occupies two positions (PS and 00), the
processor shall be installed in position 01 and 02.
Illustration
Note: The rack on which the processor is installed always has the address 0.
160
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: installation
How to mount processor modules
Introduction
CAUTION
Mounting or removing processor when powered
Do not mount or remove processor modules with power switch on
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
Note: Mounting and removing processor modules is otherwise identical to
mounting and removing other modules.
when extracting/inserting modules with the power on, the terminal block or HE10
connector must be disconnected. You must also take care to shut off the sensor/
pre-actuator supply.
35011052.06 07/2008
161
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: installation
Installing a
processor
module onto a
rack
Carry out the following steps:
Step
Action
Illustration
1
Place the pins at the back of the module into
the centering holes on the lower part of the
rack (number 1, see diagram 1).
2
Swivel the module to bring it into contact with
the rack (number 2).
3
Fix the processor module to the rack by
tightening the screw on the upper part of the
module (number 3).
Note: the mounting of processor modules is identical to the mounting of other
modules.
Note: Maximum tightening torque: 2.0 Nm (1.5 lb. ft.)
CAUTION
Mounting processor when powered
A processor module must always be mounted with the rack power supply switched
off.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
162
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: installation
Grounding
modules
Processor modules are grounded using metal plates at the rear of the module. When
the module is in place, these metal plates are in contact with the metal of the rack.
This ensures the link with the ground connection.
Illustration
Ground connection contacts
35011052.06 07/2008
163
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: installation
Mounting/Removing a PCMCIA Memory Extension Card on a TSX P57 Processor
Introduction
A clip is needed to insert a PCMCIA memory card into its slot on the TSX P57
processor.
Position of the
PCMCIA Cards in
the Processors
The following table describes the possible slots for the different types of PCMCIA
cards in the PLC processors:
Mounting of the
Card in the Clip
PCMCIA card
Slot A (top)
Slot B (bottom)
Standard: TSX
MRPP• and MFPP•
Yes
No
Application and Files: TSX MRPC•
and MCPC•
Yes
No
Data or Files:
TSX MRPF•
Yes
Yes
For TSX P57 1•3 to TSX P57 4•3 Premium PLCs, the memory cards (*) are
mounted in the clip as follows:
Step
1
2
Action
Place the end of the memory card
(opposite end to the connector)
between the arms of the clip.
The markers (in the form of a
triangle) on both the clip and the
card label must be facing same
way.
Slide the memory card into the clip
until it stops. The card is now firmly
attached to the clip.
Illustration
markers
locating device with one edge
connector
markers
locating device with 2 edges
clip
(*) Note: This mounting procedure is only for TSX MRPF data or file-type cards. See
mounting procedure below.
164
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: installation
Mounting of the
TSX MRP F• Card
in the Extractor
Step
1
2
For TSX P57 1•3 to TSX P57 4•3 Premium PLCs, the TSX MRP F• memory cards
inserted in slot B (bottom) are mounted in the extractor as follows:
Action
Illustration
Card with a PV ≤ 03 (1)
Illustration
Card with a PV > 03 (1)
Guide the memory card into the
extractor from an oblique angle,
placing the 2 pins on the card
into the 2 grooves on the
extractor.
pin
pin
Click!
Click!
Swivel the extractor on the card
until it is fully locked.
Legend
(1) : the Product Version (PV) is shown on the label affixed to the PCMCIA card.
35011052.06 07/2008
165
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: installation
Mounting of the
Memory Card in
the PLC
Carry out the following steps to install the memory card into the processor:
Step
Action
1
Remove the protective cover by unlocking it and then pulling it forwards out of
the PLC.
2
Place the PCMCIA card fitted with its clip into the opened slot. Slide the whole
thing in until the card can go no further, then press the clip to connect the card.
Example: Position of the card in slot A for TSX 57 1•3 to 4•3.
Note: For TSX 57 1•3\2•3\3•3\4•3 processors, check that the mechanical locating
devices are positioned correctly:
z 1 edge on top,
z 2 edges at the bottom.
For TSX 57 5•3 processors, two guides allow that the PCMCIA card is correctly
positioned in its slot.
Note: If the program contained in the PCMCIA memory card contains the RUN
AUTO option, the processor will automatically restart in RUN mode after the card
has been inserted.
166
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: installation
Processing on Insertion/Extraction of a PCMCIA Memory Card on a Premium
PLC
General
CAUTION
Operation without cover
The front panels of Premium PLC processors have removable covers to prevent
the accidental intrusion of objects which could damage the connector. It is
essential to leave the covers in place when no card is inserted in these slots.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
TSX P57 1•3 to
4•3 PLCs
Memory cards located in slot A (top)
The extraction (or absence) of the cover or memory card and clip causes the PLC
to stop without saving the application context. Module outputs switch to fallback
mode.
Inserting the cover or memory card with clip will cause the PLC to perform a cold
start.
DANGER
Unexpected equipment operation
If the program contained in the PCMCIA memory card includes the RUN AUTO
option, the processor will automatically restart in RUN after the card is inserted.
Ensure work area is clear before applying power.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
Memory cards located in slot B (bottom)
The PCMCIA memory card should be inserted into slot B of the processor while the
PLC power is off. Ignoring this requirement could cause the processor to
malfunction.
35011052.06 07/2008
167
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: installation
Standard and Backup Memory Cards for PLCs
Standard
Memory Cards
There are 3 types of standard memory cards:
Saved RAM memory extension cards.
Flash Eprom memory extension cards.
z Flash Eprom Backup memory cards.
z
z
Saved RAM memory extension cards:
used particularly when generating and debugging an application program. They are
used for all application transfer and modification services when online.
The memory is saved by a removable battery integrated in the memory card.
Flash Eprom memory extension cards:
used when the application program debugging has finished. It allows only a global
transfer of the application and avoids the problems associated with battery backups.
Flash Eprom Backup memory cards:
used to save the project from the controller’s internal RAM to the Backup Flash
Eprom card. The internal RAM memory can thus be reloaded using the contents of
the Backup Flash Eprom card without having to use a terminal.
WARNING
write protection switch operation with power on
It is essential that any modification of the position of the PCMCIA card write
protection switch be performed when the controller is powered down.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.
168
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: installation
Product
References for
Standard and
Flash Eprom
Extension
Memory Cards
References
The following table shows the compatibility of the cards with the processors:
Type/Capacity
Processor compatibility
TSX P57 1•3
TSX P57 2•3/2•23
PCX 57 2•3
TSX P57 3•3/3•3A/353LA/3623/
3623A
TSX P57 4•3/4•3A/4823/4823A
PCX 57 353
TSX MRP P 128K (1)
TSX MRP 032P
RAM/32K16
Yes
Yes
Yes
TSX MRP P 224K (1)
TSX MRP 064P
RAM/64K16
Yes
Yes
Yes
TSX MRP C 448K (1)
TSX MRP 0128P
RAM/128K16
No
Yes
Yes
TSX MRP C 001M (1)
TSX MRP 0256P
RAM/256K16
No
Yes
Yes
TSX MRP C 003M (1)
TSX MRP 0512P
RAM/512K16
No
Yes
Yes
TSX MFP P 128K (1)
TSX MFP 032P
Flash Eprom/
32K16
Yes
Yes
Yes
TSX MFP P 224K (1)
TSX MFP 064P
Flash Eprom/
64K16
Yes
Yes
Yes
TSX MFP 064 P2
TSX MFP 064P
Flash Eprom/
64K16
Yes (2)
Yes (2)
Yes (2)
TSX MFP P 384K (1)
TSX MFP 0128P
Flash Eprom/
128K16
No
Yes
Yes
TSX MFP 0128 P2
TSX MFP 0128P
Flash Eprom/
128K16
No
Yes (2)
Yes (2)
TSX MFP P 001M
Flash Eprom/
256K16
Flash Eprom/
384K16 (3)
Flash Eprom/
512K16 (4)
No
Yes
Yes
Legend
TSX M•• • •••K new references to replace the old TSX M•P •••P type references.
35011052.06 07/2008
169
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: installation
(2) The application found on the TSX MFP* ****2 card can only be read if the card is in a processor version < 6.1. If
the card is in a processor version ≥ 6.1, the card application is available in read and write mode.
(3) 384 K16 are only available for TSX P57 3•3M and TSX P57 3•3AM processors.
(4) 512 K16 are only available for TSX P57 4•3M processors.
Note: Memory capacity: K16= K words (16-bit word).
Product
References for
Backup
Extension
Memory Cards
References
TSX MFP B 096K (1)
TSX MFP BAK032P
The following table shows the compatibility of the cards with the processors:
Type/Capacity
BACKUP/32K16
Processor compatibility
TSX P57 103
TSX P57 2•3/2•23
PCX 57 2•3
TSX P57 3•3/3•3A/353LA/3623/
3623A
TSX P57 4•3/4•3A/4823/4823A
PCX 57 353
Yes
Yes
Yes
Legend
TSX MFP B 096K new references to replace the old TSX MFP BAK032P type references.
Note: Memory capacity: K16= K words (16-bit word).
170
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: installation
Application + Files Type Memory Cards
Application +
Files Type
Memory
Extension Cards
In addition to the conventional application storage area (program + constants), these
memory cards also have a file area for archiving/restoring the data by program.
Application examples:
z
z
automatic storage of application data and remote consultation by modem link,
storage of manufacturing formulas.
There are two types of memory card:
saved RAM memory extension cards: application + files. The memory is saved
by a removable battery built into the memory card,
z Flash Eprom memory extension card: application + files. In this instance, the
data storage area is in saved RAM which implies that this type of card must be
equipped with a back-up battery.
z
WARNING
Write protection switch operation with power on
It is essential that any modification of the position of the PCMCIA card write
protection switch be performed when the controller is powered down.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.
Cards for Harsh
Environments
35011052.06 07/2008
Three cards have been developed especially for use in harsh environments. These
are the TSX MRP C 001MC, TSX MRP C 003MC, TSX MRP C 007MC whose
characteristics are identical to the TSX MRP C 001M, TSX MRP C 003M, TSX MRP
C 007M.
171
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: installation
Product
References for
Application +
Files Extension
Memory Cards
References
The following table shows the compatibility of the cards with the processors:
Technology Type/Capacity
type
Application File zone
zone
(RAM
type)
Processor compatibility
Symbol
area
(RAM
type)
TSX P57
1•3
TSX P57 TSX P57
2•3/2•23 3•3/
3•3A/
3623/
3623A
TSX P57
453/
453A/
4823/
4823A
TSX MRP C 448K
(1)
TSX MRP 232 P
RAM
32K16
128K16
-
yes
yes
yes
yes
TSX MRP C 384K
(1)
TSX MRP 264 P
RAM
64K16
128K16
-
yes
yes
yes
yes
TSX MRP C 768K
(1)
TSX MRP 2128 P
RAM
128K16
128K16
128K16
no
yes
yes
yes
TSX MRP C 01M7 RAM
(1)
TSX MRP 3256 P
256K16
640K16
128K16
(5x128K1
6)
no
yes (2)
yes
yes
TSX MRP C 002M RAM
(1)
TSX MRP 3384 P
384K16
640K16
-
no
yes (2)
yes
yes
TSX MRP C 003M RAM
(1)
TSX MRP 0512 P
512K16
-
256K16
no
yes (2)
yes (3)
yes
TSX MRPC 007M
RAM
960K16
384K16
640K16
no
no
no
yes (4)
TSX MCP C 224K
(1)
TSX MFP 232 P
Flash
EPROM
32K16
128K16
-
yes
yes
yes
yes
TSX MCP C 224K
(1)
TSX MFP 264 P
Flash Eprom 64K16
128K16
-
yes
yes
yes
yes
172
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: installation
Legend
TSX M•• C •••• new references to replace the old TSX M•P •••P type references.
(2) The usable application size is limited to 160K16 which conforms to the characteristics of this processor.
(3) The usable application size is limited to 384K16 which conforms to the characteristics of this processor, the size
of the symbol area is limited to 120K16.
(4) Reserved.
Note: For the TSX MRPC 007M, the 960K16 application area is divided into
2*480K16:
z 480K16 for the executable code,
z 480K16 for comments and graphic information.
35011052.06 07/2008
173
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: installation
File Type Memory Card: TSX MRP F 004M Replaces Card TSX MRP DS 2048 P
At a Glance
This card is used for archiving application data.
Application examples:
z
z
storage of manufacturing formulas,
making a library.
The TSX MRP F 004M card has a Saved RAM capacity of 4 Mb. Saving is carried
out by a removable battery built into the memory card.
Compatibility
The TSX MRP F 004M memory card must be used in one of the following
processors:
TSX P57 203 and TSX P57 2623,
TSX P57 253 and TSX P57 2823,
z TSX P57 303/303A and TSX P57 3623/3623A,
z TSX P57 353/353A/353LA,
z TSX P57 453/453A and TSX P57 4823/4823A.
z
z
174
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: installation
Correspondence Table
At a Glance
Depending on the type of memory card the characteristics are detailed:
See Standard Memory Cards, p. 168,
See Product References for Backup Extension Memory Cards, p. 170,
z See Application + Files Type Memory Cards, p. 171,
z See File Type Memory Card: TSX MRP F 004M Replaces Card TSX MRP DS
2048 P, p. 174.
z
z
Table
The following table gives the correspondence between the references of the old
cards and the new references, depending on the type of card:
Memory card type:
Old reference
New reference
Standard and Flash Eprom
TSX MRP 032P
TSX MRP P 128K
Backup
Application + Files
File
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX MRP 064P
TSX MRP P 224K
TSX MRP 0128P
TSX MRP C 448K
TSX MRP 0256P
TSX MRP C 001M
TSX MRP 0512P
TSX MRP C 003M
TSX MFP 032P
TSX MFP P 128K
TSX MFP 064P
TSX MFP P 224K/
TSX MFP 064 P2
TSX MFP 0128P
TSX MFP P 384K/
TSX MFP 0128 P2
TSX MFP BAK032P
TSX MFP B 096K
TSX MRP 232 P
TSX MRP C 448K
TSX MRP 264 P
TSX MRP C 384K
TSX MRP 2128 P
TSX MRP C 768K
TSX MRP 3256 P
TSX MRP C 01M7
TSX MRP 3384 P
TSX MRP C 002M
TSX MRP 0512 P
TSX MRP C 003M
TSX MRPC 007M
TSX MRPC 007M
TSX MFP 232 P
TSX MCP C 224K
TSX MFP 264 P
TSX MCP C 224K
TSX MRP DS 2048 P
TSX MRP F 004M
175
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: installation
176
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors:
diagnostics
13
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
This Chapter deals with diagnostics for TSX P57/TSX H57 processors.
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
35011052.06 07/2008
Topic
Page
Viewing
178
Precautions to be taken when replacing a TSX P57/TSX H57 processor
181
Changing the RAM memory backup battery on TSX P57
182
Changing the Battery of a RAM Memory PCMCIA Card on the TSX P57
185
Changing the Battery of a TSX MRP DS 2048 P RAM Memory Card
187
Changing the Batteries of a PCMCIA Memory Card
189
Battery Lifetimes for the PCMCIA Memory Card
193
What happens after you press the processor RESET button
204
Finding errors using processor state LEDs
205
Non blocking errors
206
Blocking errors
208
Processor or system errors
209
177
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
Viewing
At a Glance
There are five display LEDs on the front panel of the processor for a quick diagnostic
of the status of the PLC controller.
Illustration
178
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
Description
The following table describes the role of each LED
LED flashing
LED on.
LED off.
LED status not
important
RUN
(green)
ERR
(red)
I/O
(red)
TER
(yellow)
FIP
(yellow)
Description
self-testing in progress.
reset (for processor versions ≥4.0).
reset (for processors version <4.0).
blocking software fault.
fault on Bus X (for processor versions ≥4.0).
fault on Bus X (for processor version <4.0).
hardware fault or fault on BusX. In this case, do a reset.
If the three LEDs are still on after the reset, then it is a
hardware fault.
PLC working normally, run the program.
processor or system fault
I/O fault from a module or channel or a configuration
error.
terminal port link active. The intensity of the flashing
depends on the traffic.
FIPIO bus link active. The intensity of the flashing
depends on the traffic.
PLC not configured (application absent, not valid or
incompatible).
normal state, no internal fault.
35011052.06 07/2008
179
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
RUN
(green)
ERR
(red)
I/O
(red)
TER
(yellow)
FIP
(yellow)
Description
normal state, no I/O fault.
inactive link.
inactive link.
Note:
z the FIP LED is only present on TSX P57 •53 and TSX P57 •823 processors.
180
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
Precautions to be taken when replacing a TSX P57/TSX H57 processor
Important
DANGER
Unexpected equipment operation
If the TSX P57 processor is being replaced by another processor which is not
blank (the processor has already been programmed and contains an application),
the power for all the PLC station’s control units must be switched off.
Before restoring power to the control units, check that the processor contains the
required application.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
35011052.06 07/2008
181
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
Changing the RAM memory backup battery on TSX P57
At a Glance
This battery, which is in the TSX PSY … power supply module (see Supply modules:
description, p. 344), ensures that the internal RAM memory of the processor and the
real-time clock are saved in case of a voltage power outage. It is delivered in the
same packaging as the power supply module and must be installed by the user.
Installing the
battery
Carry out the following steps:
Step
Action
1
Open the access flap on the front of the power supply module.
2
Place the battery in its slot, taking care to respect polarities as marked on the
module.
3
Close the access flap.
Illustration
182
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
Changing the
battery
The battery can be changed every year as a preventative measure or when the BAT
LED is lit.
To do this, use the same procedure as for installation, and carry out the following
steps:
Step
Action
1
Open the access flap for the battery.
2
Remove the old battery from its slot.
3
Put the new battery into place.
4
Close and lock the access flap.
Illustration
If there is a power outage while the battery is being changed, the RAM memory is
saved by the processor, as it has its own offline independent save function.
Note: so as not to forget to change the battery, you are advised to record the date
of the next change in the space provided on the inside of the flap.
35011052.06 07/2008
183
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
How often must
the battery be
changed?
Period of battery backup
The length of time during which the battery provides backup of the processor’s
internal RAM memory and the real-time clock depends on two factors:
the percentage of time for which the PLC is switched off and therefore the battery
is being used,
z the ambient temperature when the PLC is switched off.
z
Summary table:
≤ 30°C
40°C
50°C
60°C
PLC off for 12 hours 5 years
per day
3
years
2 years
1 year
PLC off for 1 hour
per day
5
years
4.5 years 4
years
Ambient temperature when inoperative
Backup time
5 years
Independent saving by the processor
The processors have their own offline independent save function to save the
processor’s internal RAM memory and the real-time clock, which allows the removal
of:
z
the battery, the power supply or the TSX P57 processor.
The backup time depends on the ambient temperature.
Assuming that the processor was switched on previously, the backup time varies in
the following way:
184
Ambient temperature when switching off
20°C
30°C
40°C
50°C
Backup time
2h
45mn
20mn
8mn
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
Changing the Battery of a RAM Memory PCMCIA Card on the TSX P57
Introduction
Some RAM memory PCMCIA cards (TSX MRP etc.) have a single battery
(reference TSX BAT M01) which needs to be changed. The various memory card
references are found in a summary table (see Correspondence Table, p. 175).
How to change
the battery
Carry out the following steps:
Step
Action
1
Remove the card from its slot by pulling the clip forwards out of the PLC.
2
Separate the PCMCIA card from its clip by pulling the two components (card and
clip) in opposite directions.
3
Hold the PCMCIA card so you can access the battery slot. This is at the end of
the card without the connector.
4
Unlock the battery holder, which is at the end of the card without the connector.
To do this, press the lock towards the bottom of the card (the opposite direction
to the write protection micro-switch) while pulling towards the back (see
illustration).
5
Remove the battery and holder unit from its slot (see illustration).
6
Swap the old battery for an identical 3V battery. Polarities must be observed by
placing the + labels on the holder and the battery on the same side.
7
Place the battery and holder unit back in its slot, then lock it. To do this, carry
out the removal procedure in reverse.
8
Fix the PCMCIA card into its clip.
9
Put the card with its clip back into the PLC.
Illustration
Write protection
Lock
Battery slot
6
Labels
35011052.06 07/2008
185
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
Battery life
See the following table:
PCMCIA card stored in normal conditions (-20°C to 70°C)
12 months
PCMCIA card fitted in an operating PLC (0°C to 60°C)
36 months
Note: During operation, the processor’s ERR LED flashes if the PCMCIA card
battery needs replacing.
186
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
Changing the Battery of a TSX MRP DS 2048 P RAM Memory Card
Introduction
The TSX MRP DS 2048 P memory extension card must have a battery (product ref.
TSX BAT M01) in order to help ensure data is saved.
How to Change
the Battery
Carry out the following steps:
35011052.06 07/2008
Step
Action
1
Remove the card from its slot by pulling the clip forwards out of the PLC.
2
Open the PCMCIA card clip.
3
Hold the PCMCIA card so you can access the battery slot. This is at the end of
the card without the connector.
4
Unlock the battery flap located at the edge of the card. To do this press the lock
towards the top of the card (the opposite direction to the write protection microswitch.
187
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
Step
5
Action
Take off the battery flap. To do this, slightly rotate the socket as shown in the
diagram. Take the card out of its slot.
Battery slot
Lock
Write protection
Labels
6
Swap the old battery for an identical 3V battery. It is essential to respect the
polarities as detailed on the memory card label.
7
Replace and then lock the battery hatch. To do this, carry out the removal
procedure in reverse.
8
Close the PCMCIA card clip.
9
Put the card with its clip back into the PLC.
Note: For the new card reference TSX MRP F 004M, (replacing card TSX MRP DS
2048 P),
z with PV lower than or equal to 03, see (Installation Manual Volume 1),
z with PV greater than or equal to 03, see Changing the Batteries of a PCMCIA
Memory Card, p. 189,
Battery Life
188
See the following table:
PCMCIA card stored in normal conditions.
12 months
PCMCIA card fitted in an operating PLC (0°C to 60°C)
36 months
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
Changing the Batteries of a PCMCIA Memory Card
General Points
Memory cards:
TSX MRP P• standard RAM
TSX MRP C• RAM for files and application and TSX MCP C• Flash EPROM
z TSX MRP F• data and file-type
z
z
have 2 backup batteries TSX BAT M02 (main) and TSX BAT M03 (auxiliary) that
need to be changed.
Two methods exist:
A preventive method of periodic battery changing that does not involve checking
the condition of the batteries,
z A predictive method, based on the signal sent by a system bit. This method is only
available in certain memory cards.
z
Preventive
Method
This method is valid for all memory card versions and for all the PLCs using these
cards (i.e. Premium, Atrium). Change both batteries following the indications related
to the PCMCIA PV, how the PLC is used and the battery life (see Battery Lifetimes
for the PCMCIA Memory Card, p. 193). The two batteries may be changed in any
order: the application will be saved by the memory card. Battery changing
procedure: see the instructions provided with the memory cards.
Note:
z Batteries should not be removed from their positions simultaneously. One
battery backs up the data and applications, while the other is being replaced.
z The memory card should never remain more than 24 hours without a main
battery in working state.
z To economize, auxiliary batteries may only be changed every 1.5 years which
is the standard battery life.
z The battery lives shown above are calculated at ambient operating temperature
around 60°C, and PLC only powered up 21% of total annual time (i.e. 8 hours a
day, with 30 days maintenance per year).
35011052.06 07/2008
189
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
Predictive
method
This maintenance method uses the %S67 and %S75 bits and the ERR diode on the
Premium interface. This method implies that the auxiliary battery is changed every
18 months. It can only be implemented:
on low or medium capacity PV06 RAM memory cards (see product version on the
card label), having the following storage capacity when used with a PL7 ≤ 768K
(TSX MRP P •••• K, TSX MCP C •••• K, TSX MRP C 448 K, TSX MRP C 768 K),
z providing the card is installed in the top PCMCIA slot on all the Premium
processors.
z providing the card is installed in the bottom PCMCIA slot on Premium
TSX P57 4•• and Premium TSX P57 5•• processors.
z
%S67 system bit (top slot card) or %S75 system bit (bottom slot card) on 1 or
flashing processor interface ERR diode indicate main battery low. The main battery
must be replaced within 8 days, as indicated in the instructions provided with the
memory cards.
Note:
If the PLC is to remain switched off or the memory card is removed for more than
8 days, and the main battery has exceeded its standard life, save the application
under PL7.
Changing the
Batteries
190
Perform the following steps:
Step
Action
1
Take the card out of its slot (see Mounting/Removing a PCMCIA Memory
Extension Card on a TSX P57 Processor, p. 164).
2
Separate the PCMCIA card (see Mounting/Removing a PCMCIA Memory
Extension Card on a TSX P57 Processor, p. 164) from its clip (or caddy).
3
Hold the PCMCIA card so you can access the battery slot. This is at the end of the
card without the connector.
4
Replacement of the TSX BAT M02 battery: see table 1.
Replacement of the TSX BAT M03 battery: see table 2.
5
Attach the PCMCIA card (see Mounting/Removing a PCMCIA Memory Extension
Card on a TSX P57 Processor, p. 164) to its clip (or caddy).
6
Place the card back in the PLC. (see Mounting/Removing a PCMCIA Memory
Extension Card on a TSX P57 Processor, p. 164)
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
Procedure for the
TSX BAT M02
Battery:
35011052.06 07/2008
The following table shows the procedure for changing the main battery:
Step
Action
1
Toggle the changeover
lever toward the
TSX BAT M03 (AUX)
battery in order to remove
the drawer of the main
battery.
2
Remove the used battery
from its holder:
3
Place the new battery in
the holder, taking care to
respect the polarity.
4
Insert the holder
containing the battery in
the card.
Illustration
191
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
Procedure for the
TSX BAT M03
Battery:
192
The following table shows the procedure for changing the auxiliary battery:
Step
Action
1
Toggle the changeover
lever toward the
TSX BAT M02 (MAIN)
battery in order to remove
the drawer of the battery.
2
Remove the used battery
from its holder:
3
Place the new battery in
the holder, taking care to
respect the polarity.
4
Insert the holder
containing the battery in
the card.
Illustration
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
Battery Lifetimes for the PCMCIA Memory Card
Purpose
The purpose of this document is to give detailed information about the lifetime of
batteries inside PCMCIA memory cards. The estimation of these lifetimes are based
on data from component manufacturers.
Scope
The lifetime information is estimated for:
RAM PCMCIA memory cards,
The three different cases of Product Version (PV): PV1/2/3, PV4/5 and PV6,
z Four ambient temperatures for the PLC location: 25°C / 40°C / 50°C / 60°C,
z Four different usage cases of the PCMCIAs: 100%, 92%, 66% and 33% of PLC
power-up time. These values are for the following customer configurations:
z 100%: PLC powered up all year long or during 51 weeks,
z 92%: PLC powered up all year long except during one month of maintenance,
z 66%: PLC powered up all year long except during all weekends plus one
month of maintenance,
z 33%: PLC powered up all year long 12 hours a day, except during all
weekends plus one month of maintenance.
z A Min (minimum) and a Typical lifetime value:
z The Min value comes from the most unfavorable characteristics given by the
component manufacturers. The actual observed lifetime will be greater than
this value.
z The typical value comes from the typical characteristics of the component.
z
z
35011052.06 07/2008
193
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
Main Battery
Lifetime of PV1/2/
3 PCMCIA (in
Years)
The table below presents the lifetime of main battery TSX BAT M01(PV1/2/3) for
PCMCIA memory cards:
PV1/2/3
For a 25°C PLC ambient temperature
100% powered up 92% PU (30d maint.
66% PU (WE. 30d
maint.
33% PU (12h.WE. 30d
maint.
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
TSX MCP C 224K
7.10
7.10
6.71
5.58
5.77
3.36
4.82
2.20
TSX MCP C 512K
7.10
7.10
6.71
5.65
5.77
3.46
4.82
2.28
TSX MCP C 002M
7.10
7.10
6.29
3.82
4.66
1.57
3.45
0.88
TSX MRP P128K
7.10
7.10
6.71
5.58
5.77
3.36
4.82
2.20
TSX MRP P224K
7.10
7.10
6.71
5.65
5.77
3.46
4.82
2.28
TSX MRP P384K
7.10
7.10
6.71
4.99
5.77
2.60
4.82
1.59
TSX MRP C448K
7.10
7.10
6.29
4.65
4.66
2.24
3.45
1.33
TSX MRP C768K
7.10
7.10
6.29
4.65
4.66
2.24
3.45
1.33
TSX MRP C001M
7.10
7.10
5.91
3.95
3.91
1.66
2.68
0.94
TSX MRP C01M7
7.10
7.10
5.58
3.43
3.36
1.32
2.20
0.72
TSX MRP C002M
7.10
7.10
5.91
3.34
3.91
1.26
2.68
0.69
TSX MRP C003M
7.10
7.10
5.58
2.60
3.36
0.87
2.20
0.47
TSX MRP C007M
7.10
7.10
4.56
1.59
2.16
0.46
1.27
0.24
TSX MRP F004M
7.10
7.10
5.58
2.60
3.36
0.87
2.20
0.47
TSX MRP F008M
7.10
7.10
4.56
1.59
2.16
0.46
1.27
0.24
PV1/2/3
For a 40°C PLC ambient temperature
100% powered up 92% PU (30d maint.
66% PU (WE. 30d
maint.
33% PU (12h.WE. 30d
maint.
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
TSX MCP C 224K
3.55
3.55
3.54
3.20
3.54
2.46
3.48
1.87
TSX MCP C 512K
3.55
3.55
3.54
3.22
3.54
2.51
3.48
1.93
TSX MCP C 002M
3.55
3.55
3.42
2.53
3.08
1.34
2.71
0.82
TSX MRP P128K
3.55
3.55
3.54
3.20
3.54
2.46
3.48
1.87
TSX MRP P224K
3.55
3.55
3.54
3.22
3.54
2.51
3.48
1.93
TSX MRP P384K
3.55
3.55
3.54
3.00
3.54
2.02
3.48
1.41
TSX MRP C448K
3.55
3.55
3.42
2.87
3.08
1.80
2.71
1.20
TSX MRP C768K
3.55
3.55
3.42
2.87
3.08
1.80
2.71
1.20
TSX MRP C001M
3.55
3.55
3.30
2.59
2.74
1.40
2.21
0.87
194
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
PV1/2/3
For a 40°C PLC ambient temperature
100% powered up 92% PU (30d maint.
66% PU (WE. 30d
maint.
33% PU (12h.WE. 30d
maint.
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
TSX MRP C01M7
3.55
3.55
3.20
2.35
2.46
1.15
1.87
0.69
TSX MRP C002M
3.55
3.55
3.30
2.31
2.74
1.11
2.21
0.65
TSX MRP C003M
3.55
3.55
3.20
1.93
2.46
0.80
1.87
0.45
TSX MRP C007M
3.55
3.55
2.84
1.31
1.75
0.44
1.16
0.24
TSX MRP F004M
3.55
3.55
3.20
1.93
2.46
0.80
1.87
0.45
TSX MRP F008M
3.55
3.55
2.84
1.31
1.75
0.44
1.16
0.24
PV1/2/3
For a 50°C PLC ambient temperature
100% powered up 92% PU (30d maint.
66% PU (WE. 30d
maint.
33% PU (12h.WE. 30d
maint.
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
TSX MCP C 224K
2.35
2.35
2.42
2.25
2.69
2.02
3.10
1.75
TSX MCP C 512K
2.35
2.35
2.42
2.26
2.69
2.05
3.10
1.81
TSX MCP C 002M
2.35
2.35
2.36
1.90
2.42
1.20
2.47
0.80
TSX MRP P128K
2.35
2.35
2.42
2.25
2.69
2.02
3.10
1.75
TSX MRP P224K
2.35
2.35
2.42
2.26
2.69
2.05
3.10
1.81
TSX MRP P384K
2.35
2.35
2.42
2.15
2.69
1.71
3.10
1.34
TSX MRP C448K
2.35
2.35
2.36
2.09
2.42
1.55
2.47
1.15
TSX MRP C768K
2.35
2.35
2.36
2.09
2.42
1.55
2.47
1.15
TSX MRP C001M
2.35
2.35
2.31
1.93
2.20
1.25
2.05
0.85
TSX MRP C01M7
2.35
2.35
2.25
1.80
2.02
1.04
1.75
0.67
TSX MRP C002M
2.35
2.35
2.31
1.77
2.20
1.01
2.05
0.64
TSX MRP C003M
2.35
2.35
2.25
1.54
2.02
0.75
1.75
0.44
TSX MRP C007M
2.35
2.35
2.07
1.12
1.51
0.42
1.11
0.23
TSX MRP F004M
2.35
2.35
2.25
1.54
2.02
0.75
1.75
0.44
TSX MRP F008M
2.35
2.35
2.07
1.12
1.51
0.42
1.11
0.23
PV1/2/3
For a 60°C PLC ambient temperature
100% powered up 92% PU (30d maint.
66% PU (WE. 30d
maint.
33% PU (12h.WE. 30d
maint.
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
TSX MCP C 224K
1.57
1.57
1.63
1.56
1.91
1.54
2.40
1.50
TSX MCP C 512K
1.57
1.57
1.63
1.56
1.91
1.56
2.40
1.54
35011052.06 07/2008
195
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
PV1/2/3
For a 40°C PLC ambient temperature
100% powered up 92% PU (30d maint.
66% PU (WE. 30d
maint.
33% PU (12h.WE. 30d
maint.
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
TSX MRP C01M7
3.55
3.55
3.20
2.35
2.46
1.15
1.87
0.69
TSX MRP C002M
3.55
3.55
3.30
2.31
2.74
1.11
2.21
0.65
TSX MRP C003M
3.55
3.55
3.20
1.93
2.46
0.80
1.87
0.45
TSX MRP C007M
3.55
3.55
2.84
1.31
1.75
0.44
1.16
0.24
TSX MRP F004M
3.55
3.55
3.20
1.93
2.46
0.80
1.87
0.45
TSX MRP F008M
3.55
3.55
2.84
1.31
1.75
0.44
1.16
0.24
PV1/2/3
For a 50°C PLC ambient temperature
100% powered up 92% PU (30d maint.
66% PU (WE. 30d
maint.
33% PU (12h.WE. 30d
maint.
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
TSX MCP C 224K
2.35
2.35
2.42
2.25
2.69
2.02
3.10
1.75
TSX MCP C 512K
2.35
2.35
2.42
2.26
2.69
2.05
3.10
1.81
TSX MCP C 002M
2.35
2.35
2.36
1.90
2.42
1.20
2.47
0.80
TSX MRP P128K
2.35
2.35
2.42
2.25
2.69
2.02
3.10
1.75
TSX MRP P224K
2.35
2.35
2.42
2.26
2.69
2.05
3.10
1.81
TSX MRP P384K
2.35
2.35
2.42
2.15
2.69
1.71
3.10
1.34
TSX MRP C448K
2.35
2.35
2.36
2.09
2.42
1.55
2.47
1.15
TSX MRP C768K
2.35
2.35
2.36
2.09
2.42
1.55
2.47
1.15
TSX MRP C001M
2.35
2.35
2.31
1.93
2.20
1.25
2.05
0.85
TSX MRP C01M7
2.35
2.35
2.25
1.80
2.02
1.04
1.75
0.67
TSX MRP C002M
2.35
2.35
2.31
1.77
2.20
1.01
2.05
0.64
TSX MRP C003M
2.35
2.35
2.25
1.54
2.02
0.75
1.75
0.44
TSX MRP C007M
2.35
2.35
2.07
1.12
1.51
0.42
1.11
0.23
TSX MRP F004M
2.35
2.35
2.25
1.54
2.02
0.75
1.75
0.44
TSX MRP F008M
2.35
2.35
2.07
1.12
1.51
0.42
1.11
0.23
PV1/2/3
For a 60°C PLC ambient temperature
100% powered up 92% PU (30d maint.
66% PU (WE. 30d
maint.
33% PU (12h.WE. 30d
maint.
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
TSX MCP C 224K
1.57
1.57
1.63
1.56
1.91
1.54
2.40
1.50
TSX MCP C 512K
1.57
1.57
1.63
1.56
1.91
1.56
2.40
1.54
196
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
PV1/2/3
For a 60°C PLC ambient temperature
100% powered up 92% PU (30d maint.
66% PU (WE. 30d
maint.
33% PU (12h.WE. 30d
maint.
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
TSX MCP C 002M
1.57
1.57
1.61
1.38
1.77
1.01
2.00
0.74
TSX MRP P128K
1.57
1.57
1.63
1.56
1.91
1.54
2.40
1.50
TSX MRP P224K
1.57
1.57
1.63
1.56
1.91
1.56
2.40
1.54
TSX MRP P384K
1.57
1.57
1.63
1.51
1.91
1.36
2.40
1.19
TSX MRP C448K
1.57
1.57
1.61
1.47
1.77
1.25
2.00
1.04
TSX MRP C768K
1.57
1.57
1.61
1.47
1.77
1.25
2.00
1.04
TSX MRP C001M
1.57
1.57
1.58
1.40
1.65
1.05
1.72
0.78
TSX MRP C01M7
1.57
1.57
1.56
1.33
1.54
0.90
1.50
0.63
TSX MRP C002M
1.57
1.57
1.58
1.31
1.65
0.87
1.72
0.60
TSX MRP C003M
1.57
1.57
1.56
1.18
1.54
0.67
1.50
0.42
TSX MRP C007M
1.57
1.57
1.47
0.92
1.23
0.40
1.00
0.23
TSX MRP F004M
1.57
1.57
1.56
1.18
1.54
0.67
1.50
0.42
TSX MRP F008M
1.57
1.57
1.47
0.92
1.23
0.40
1.00
0.23
35011052.06 07/2008
197
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
Main Battery
Lifetime of PV4/5
PCMCIA (in
Years)
The table below presents the lifetime of main battery TSX BAT M02 (PV4/5) for
PCMCIA memory cards:
PV4/5
For a 25°C PLC ambient temperature
100% powered up 92% PU (30d maint.
66% PU (WE. 30d
maint.
33% PU (12h.WE. 30d
maint.
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
TSX MCP C 224K
7.22
7.22
7.15
6.27
7.02
4.48
6.76
3.23
TSX MCP C 512K
7.22
7.22
7.15
6.33
7.02
4.59
6.76
3.35
TSX MCP C 002M
7.22
7.22
6.83
4.69
5.90
2.25
4.96
1.33
TSX MRP P128K
7.22
7.22
7.15
6.27
7.02
4.48
6.76
3.23
TSX MRP P224K
7.22
7.22
7.15
6.33
7.02
4.59
6.76
3.35
TSX MRP P384K
7.22
7.22
7.15
5.77
7.02
3.57
6.76
2.36
TSX MRP C448K
7.22
7.22
6.83
5.47
5.90
3.12
4.96
1.99
TSX MRP C768K
7.22
7.22
6.83
5.47
5.90
3.12
4.96
1.99
TSX MRP C001M
7.22
7.22
6.54
4.82
5.09
2.37
3.91
1.41
TSX MRP C01M7
7.22
7.22
6.27
4.30
4.48
1.91
3.23
1.10
TSX MRP C002M
7.22
7.22
6.54
4.20
5.09
1.83
3.91
1.04
TSX MRP C003M
7.22
7.22
6.27
3.41
4.48
1.29
3.23
0.71
TSX MRP C007M
7.22
7.22
5.39
2.21
3.02
0.70
1.91
0.37
TSX MRP F004M
7.22
7.22
6.27
3.41
4.48
1.29
3.23
0.71
TSX MRP F008M
7.22
7.22
5.39
2.21
3.02
0.70
1.91
0.37
PV4/5
For a 40°C PLC ambient temperature
100% powered up 92% PU (30d maint.
66% PU (WE. 30d
maint.
33% PU (12h.WE. 30d
maint.
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
TSX MCP C 224K
4.63
4.63
4.72
4.32
5.09
3.61
5.59
2.94
TSX MCP C 512K
4.63
4.63
4.72
4.35
5.09
3.68
5.59
3.04
TSX MCP C 002M
4.63
4.63
4.58
3.51
4.48
2.00
4.30
1.28
TSX MRP P128K
4.63
4.63
4.72
4.32
5.09
3.61
5.59
2.94
TSX MRP P224K
4.63
4.63
4.72
4.35
5.09
3.68
5.59
3.04
TSX MRP P384K
4.63
4.63
4.72
4.08
5.09
2.99
5.59
2.20
TSX MRP C448K
4.63
4.63
4.58
3.93
4.48
2.68
4.30
1.87
TSX MRP C768K
4.63
4.63
4.58
3.93
4.48
2.68
4.30
1.87
TSX MRP C001M
4.63
4.63
4.45
3.58
4.00
2.10
3.49
1.35
198
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
PV4/5
For a 40°C PLC ambient temperature
100% powered up 92% PU (30d maint.
66% PU (WE. 30d
maint.
33% PU (12h.WE. 30d
maint.
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
TSX MRP C01M7
4.63
4.63
4.32
3.29
3.61
1.73
2.94
1.06
TSX MRP C002M
4.63
4.63
4.45
3.23
4.00
1.66
3.49
1.01
TSX MRP C003M
4.63
4.63
4.32
2.74
3.61
1.21
2.94
0.69
TSX MRP C007M
4.63
4.63
3.89
1.91
2.60
0.67
1.80
0.36
TSX MRP F004M
4.63
4.63
4.32
2.74
3.61
1.21
2.94
0.69
TSX MRP F008M
4.63
4.63
3.89
1.91
2.60
0.67
1.80
0.36
PV4/5
For a 50°C PLC ambient temperature
100% powered up 92% PU (30d maint.
66% PU (WE. 30d
maint.
33% PU (12h.WE. 30d
maint.
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
TSX MCP C 224K
2.58
2.58
2.69
2.56
3.12
2.50
3.89
2.39
TSX MCP C 512K
2.58
2.58
2.69
2.56
3.12
2.53
3.89
2.45
TSX MCP C 002M
2.58
2.58
2.64
2.25
2.88
1.61
3.22
1.16
TSX MRP P128K
2.58
2.58
2.69
2.56
3.12
2.50
3.89
2.39
TSX MRP P224K
2.58
2.58
2.69
2.56
3.12
2.53
3.89
2.45
TSX MRP P384K
2.58
2.58
2.69
2.47
3.12
2.18
3.89
1.88
TSX MRP C448K
2.58
2.58
2.64
2.41
2.88
2.01
3.22
1.63
TSX MRP C768K
2.58
2.58
2.64
2.41
2.88
2.01
3.22
1.63
TSX MRP C001M
2.58
2.58
2.60
2.28
2.68
1.67
2.74
1.23
TSX MRP C01M7
2.58
2.58
2.56
2.15
2.50
1.42
2.39
0.98
TSX MRP C002M
2.58
2.58
2.60
2.13
2.68
1.38
2.74
0.94
TSX MRP C003M
2.58
2.58
2.56
1.90
2.50
1.05
2.39
0.66
TSX MRP C007M
2.58
2.58
2.40
1.46
1.97
0.62
1.58
0.35
TSX MRP F004M
2.58
2.58
2.56
1.90
2.50
1.05
2.39
0.66
TSX MRP F008M
2.58
2.58
2.40
1.46
1.97
0.62
1.58
0.35
PV4/5
For a 60°C PLC ambient temperature
100% powered up 92% PU (30d maint.
66% PU (WE. 30d
maint.
33% PU (12h.WE. 30d
maint.
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
TSX MCP C 224K
1.75
1.75
1.84
1.78
2.21
1.88
2.95
2.00
TSX MCP C 512K
1.75
1.75
1.84
1.78
2.21
1.90
2.95
2.04
35011052.06 07/2008
199
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
PV4/5
For a 60°C PLC ambient temperature
100% powered up 92% PU (30d maint.
66% PU (WE. 30d
maint.
33% PU (12h.WE. 30d
maint.
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
TSX MCP C 002M
1.75
1.75
1.82
1.62
2.09
1.33
2.55
1.06
TSX MRP P128K
1.75
1.75
1.84
1.78
2.21
1.88
2.95
2.00
TSX MRP P224K
1.75
1.75
1.84
1.78
2.21
1.90
2.95
2.04
TSX MRP P384K
1.75
1.75
1.84
1.73
2.21
1.70
2.95
1.63
TSX MRP C448K
1.75
1.75
1.82
1.71
2.09
1.59
2.55
1.44
TSX MRP C768K
1.75
1.75
1.82
1.71
2.09
1.59
2.55
1.44
TSX MRP C001M
1.75
1.75
1.80
1.64
1.98
1.37
2.24
1.11
TSX MRP C01M7
1.75
1.75
1.78
1.57
1.88
1.20
2.00
0.91
TSX MRP C002M
1.75
1.75
1.80
1.56
1.98
1.17
2.24
0.87
TSX MRP C003M
1.75
1.75
1.78
1.44
1.88
0.92
2.00
0.62
TSX MRP C007M
1.75
1.75
1.70
1.17
1.56
0.57
1.40
0.34
TSX MRP F004M
1.75
1.75
1.78
1.44
1.88
0.92
2.00
0.62
TSX MRP F008M
1.75
1.75
1.70
1.17
1.56
0.57
1.40
0.34
200
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
Main Battery
Lifetime of PV6
PCMCIA (in
Years)
The table below presents the lifetime of main battery TSX BAT M02 (PV6) for
PCMCIA memory cards:
PV6
For a 25°C PLC ambient temperature
100% powered up 92% PU (30d maint.
66% PU (WE. 30d
maint.
33% PU (12h.WE. 30d
maint.
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
TSX MCP C 224K
7.2
7.2
7.2
6.3
7.0
4.5
6.8
3.2
TSX MCP C 512K
7.2
7.2
7.2
6.5
7.0
5.1
6.8
3.9
TSX MCP C 002M
7.2
7.2
6.8
5.8
5.9
3.6
5.0
2.4
TSX MRP P128K
7.2
7.2
7.2
6.3
7.0
4.5
6.8
3.2
TSX MRP P224K
7.2
7.2
7.2
6.5
7.0
5.1
6.8
3.9
TSX MRP P384K
7.2
7.2
7.2
6.5
7.0
5.1
6.8
3.9
TSX MRP C448K
7.2
7.2
6.8
5.8
5.9
3.6
5.0
2.4
TSX MRP C768K
7.2
7.2
6.8
5.8
5.9
3.6
5.0
2.4
TSX MRP C001M
7.2
7.2
6.5
5.2
5.1
2.8
3.9
1.7
TSX MRP C01M7
7.2
7.2
6.3
4.7
4.5
2.3
3.2
1.4
TSX MRP C002M
7.2
7.2
6.5
5.2
5.1
2.8
3.9
1.7
TSX MRP C003M
7.2
7.2
6.3
4.7
4.5
2.3
3.2
1.4
TSX MRP C007M
7.2
7.2
5.4
3.5
3.0
1.3
1.9
0.7
TSX MRP F004M
7.2
7.2
6.3
4.7
4.5
2.3
3.2
1.4
TSX MRP F008M
7.2
7.2
5.4
3.5
3.0
1.3
1.9
0.7
PV6
For a 40°C PLC ambient temperature
100% powered up 92% PU (30d maint.
66% PU (WE. 30d
maint.
33% PU (12h.WE. 30d
maint.
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
TSX MCP C 224K
4.6
4.6
4.7
4.3
5.1
3.6
5.6
2.9
TSX MCP C 512K
4.6
4.6
4.7
4.4
5.1
4.0
5.6
3.5
TSX MCP C 002M
4.6
4.6
4.6
4.1
4.5
3.0
4.3
2.2
TSX MRP P128K
4.6
4.6
4.7
4.3
5.1
3.6
5.6
2.9
TSX MRP P224K
4.6
4.6
4.7
4.4
5.1
4.0
5.6
3.5
TSX MRP P384K
4.6
4.6
4.7
4.4
5.1
4.0
5.6
3.5
TSX MRP C448K
4.6
4.6
4.6
4.1
4.5
3.0
4.3
2.2
TSX MRP C768K
4.6
4.6
4.6
4.1
4.5
3.0
4.3
2.2
TSX MRP C001M
4.6
4.6
4.4
3.8
4.0
2.4
3.5
1.6
35011052.06 07/2008
201
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
PV6
For a 40°C PLC ambient temperature
100% powered up 92% PU (30d maint.
66% PU (WE. 30d
maint.
33% PU (12h.WE. 30d
maint.
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
TSX MRP C01M7
4.6
4.6
4.3
3.5
3.6
2.0
2.9
1.3
TSX MRP C002M
4.6
4.6
4.4
3.8
4.0
2.4
3.5
1.6
TSX MRP C003M
4.6
4.6
4.3
3.5
3.6
2.0
2.9
1.3
TSX MRP C007M
4.6
4.6
3.9
2.8
2.6
1.2
1.8
0.7
TSX MRP F004M
4.6
4.6
4.3
3.5
3.6
2.0
2.9
1.3
TSX MRP F008M
4.6
4.6
3.9
2.8
2.6
1.2
1.8
0.7
PV6
For a 50°C PLC ambient temperature
100% powered up 92% PU (30d maint.
66% PU (WE. 30d
maint.
33% PU (12h.WE. 30d
maint.
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
TSX MCP C 224K
2.6
2.6
2.7
2.6
3.1
2.5
3.9
2.4
TSX MCP C 512K
2.6
2.6
2.7
2.6
3.1
2.7
3.9
2.7
TSX MCP C 002M
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.5
2.9
2.2
3.2
1.9
TSX MRP P128K
2.6
2.6
2.7
2.6
3.1
2.5
3.9
2.4
TSX MRP P224K
2.6
2.6
2.7
2.6
3.1
2.7
3.9
2.7
TSX MRP P384K
2.6
2.6
2.7
2.6
3.1
2.7
3.9
2.7
TSX MRP C448K
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.5
2.9
2.2
3.2
1.9
TSX MRP C768K
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.5
2.9
2.2
3.2
1.9
TSX MRP C001M
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.4
2.7
1.9
2.7
1.5
TSX MRP C01M7
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.3
2.5
1.6
2.4
1.2
TSX MRP C002M
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.4
2.7
1.9
2.7
1.5
TSX MRP C003M
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.3
2.5
1.6
2.4
1.2
TSX MRP C007M
2.6
2.6
2.4
1.9
2.0
1.1
1.6
0.7
TSX MRP F004M
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.3
2.5
1.6
2.4
1.2
TSX MRP F008M
2.6
2.6
2.4
1.9
2.0
1.1
1.6
0.7
PV6
For a 60°C PLC ambient temperature
100% powered up 92% PU (30d maint.
66% PU (WE. 30d
maint.
33% PU (12h.WE. 30d
maint.
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
TSX MCP C 224K
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
2.2
1.9
3.0
2.0
TSX MCP C 512K
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
2.2
2.0
3.0
2.2
202
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
PV6
For a 60°C PLC ambient temperature
100% powered up 92% PU (30d maint.
66% PU (WE. 30d
maint.
33% PU (12h.WE. 30d
maint.
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
Typical
Min
TSX MCP C 002M
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.7
2.1
1.7
2.5
1.6
TSX MRP P128K
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
2.2
1.9
3.0
2.0
TSX MRP P224K
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
2.2
2.0
3.0
2.2
TSX MRP P384K
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
2.2
2.0
3.0
2.2
TSX MRP C448K
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.7
2.1
1.7
2.5
1.6
TSX MRP C768K
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.7
2.1
1.7
2.5
1.6
TSX MRP C001M
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.7
2.0
1.5
2.2
1.3
TSX MRP C01M7
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.6
1.9
1.3
2.0
1.1
TSX MRP C002M
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.7
2.0
1.5
2.2
1.3
TSX MRP C003M
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.6
1.9
1.3
2.0
1.1
TSX MRP C007M
1.8
1.8
1.7
1.4
1.6
0.9
1.4
0.6
TSX MRP F004M
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.6
1.9
1.3
2.0
1.1
TSX MRP F008M
1.8
1.8
1.7
1.4
1.6
0.9
1.4
0.6
Minimum
Lifetime of the
Main Battery, in a
Powered Down
PLC
In a powered down PLC, the minimum lifetime of the main battery is 6 months in PV6
PCMCIAs.
Auxiliary Battery
Lifetime
The auxiliary battery TSX BATM 03 is included in the PCMCIA product. Whatever
the usage cases and ambient temperature, the lifetime of the auxiliary battery is:
5 years in PV1/2/3
1.7 years in PV4/5
z 5 years in PV6
z
z
35011052.06 07/2008
203
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
What happens after you press the processor RESET button
General
All processors have a RESET button on their front panel, which when pressed,
causes a cold start of the PLC, in RUN or in STOP mode (starting in RUN or in STOP
mode is defined at configuration), on the application contained in the memory card
(or in the internal RAM)…
RESET following
a fault detected
by the processor
As soon as a processor detects a fault, the alarm relay on rack 0 (with TSX 57
processor) is deactivated (open contact) and the module outputs switch to fallback
position or are maintained in the current state depending on the selection made in
configuration. Pressing the RESET button causes the PLC, forced into STOP, to
cold start.
Note: When the RESET button is pressed, and during the PLC cold start, the
terminal link is deactivated.
204
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
Finding errors using processor state LEDs
General
The state LEDs situated on the processor enable the user to be informed about the
operating mode of the PLC but on possible errors.
Errors detected by the PLC concerned:
circuits constituting the PLC and/or its modules: internal errors,
the process controlled by the PLC or the cabling of the process: external errors,
z functioning of the application executed by the PLC: internal or external errors.
z
z
Error detection
Detecting errors is carried out during start-up (autotest) or during functioning (this is
the case for most hardware errors), during exchanges with modules or during the
execution of a program instruction.
Certain "serious" errors require the PLC to be restarted, others are controlled by the
user who decides on the behavior to adopt according to the desired level of
application function.
There are three types of error:
non blocking,
blocking,
z processor or system error.
z
z
35011052.06 07/2008
205
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
Non blocking errors
General
This concerns an anomaly, provoked by an input/output error on the bus X, on the
FIPIO bus or by the execution of an instruction. It can be processed by the user
program and does not change the PLC state.
Non blocking
errors linked to
inputs/outputs
The identification of a non blocking error linked to the inputs/outputs is signaled by:
the I/O state LED of the processor is lit,
the I/O state LEDs of the modules responding to a fault are lit, (on bus X and
FIPIO bus),
z the bits and error words associated to the channel:
z Inputs/Outputs on bus X:
%Ixy.i.ERR bit = 1 indicates a detected channel fault (implicit exchanges),
%Mwxy.i.2 words indicate the type of channel error (explicit exchanges),
z Inputs/Outputs on FIPIO bus:
%I\p.2.c\m.v.ERR bit = 1 indicates a detected channel fault (implicit
exchanges),
%MW\p.2.c\m.v.2 words indicate the type of channel errors (explicit
exchanges),
z bits and error words associated with the module:
z Module on bus X:
%Ixy.MOD.ERR bit = 1 indicates a detected channel fault (implicit exchanges),
%MWxy.MOD.2 words indicate the type of channel error (explicit exchanges),
z Module on FIPIO bus:
%I\p.2.c\0.MOD.ERR bit = 1 indicates a detected channel fault (implicit
exchanges),
%MW\p.2.c\0.MOD.2 words indicate the type of channel error (explicit
exchanges),
z system bits:
%S10: I/O error (on bus X or FIPIO bus),
%S16: I/O error (on bus X and FIPIO bus) in the task in progress,
%S40 à %S47: I/O error in racks at addresses 0 to 7 on the bus X.
z
z
Diagnostics table:
Status LED
206
ERR
I/O
System
bits
Errors
RUN
i
i
To
%S10
Input/output error: channel supply fault,
channel disjointed, module not conforming to
configuration, out of service, module supply
fault.
i
i
To
%S16
Error on input/output in a task.
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
i
i
To
%S40 to
%S47
Error on inputs/outputs at rack level
(%S40: rack 0,
%S47: rack 7)
Legend:
To: Lit LED,
I: State not determined.
Non blocking
errors linked to
program
execution
The indication of a non blocking error linked to program execution is signaled by
setting to state 1 of one or several system bits %S15, %S18, %S20.
The test and setting to state 0 of the system bits are controlled by the user.
Diagnostics table:
Status LED
RUN
ERR
System
bits
Errors
I/O
To
i
i
%S15=1
Character string manipulation error.
To
i
i
%S18=1
Capacity overrun, error on floating point or
division by 0.
To
i
i
%S20=1
Index overflow.
Legend:
To: Lit LED,
I: State not determined.
Note: The program diagnostics function, accessible through the PL7 Pro software,
enables certain non blocking errors linked to the program execution, to be turned
into blocking errors. The nature of the error is indicated in the system word %SW
125.
35011052.06 07/2008
207
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
Blocking errors
General
These errors, provoked by the application program, disable its execution but do not
cause system errors. On such an error, the application stops immediately and goes
to HALT state (the tasks are all stopped in their current instruction).
There are two possibilities for restarting the application:
z
z
by the command INIT through the PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro software,
by the processor RESET button.
The application is thus in a preliminary state: the data has its preliminary values, the
tasks are stopped at the end of the cycle, the input image is updated and the outputs
are commissioned in fallback position, the RUN command enables application
restart.
The indication of a blocking error is signaled by the state LEDs (ERR and RUN)
flashing and according to the nature of the error by the setting to 1 of one or several
of the system bits %S11 and %S26. The nature of the error is indicated in the system
word %SW 125.
Diagnostics table:
State LEDs
System
Bits
Errors
RUN
ERR
I/O
C
C
i
%S11=1
Watchdog overrun
C
C
i
%S26=1
Overrun of the grafcet activity table
Step, Grafcet not resolved
C
C
i
Executing the HALT instruction
C
C
i
Executing a non resolved JUMP
Legend:
C: blinking
i: not determined
208
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
Processor or system errors
General
These serious faults on either processor (hardware or software), or on bus X
cabling no longer allow that the system will function correctly. They cause the PLC
to restart in ERROR which requires a cold restart. The next cold restart will be forced
into STOP to avoid the PLC falling back into error.
Diagnostics table:
State LEDs
ERR
I/O
System word
%SW124
Errors
RUN
E
To
To
H’80’
System watchdog error or error on bus X
cabling
E
C
C
H’81’
E
To
To
Cabling error on bus X
System code error, unforeseen error
Overrun of the system task batteries
Overrun of the PL7 task batteries
Legend:
To: on
C: blinking
E: not determined
Diagnostics of
processor
errors:
35011052.06 07/2008
When the PLC has stopped in error, it is no longer able to communicate with a
diagnostics device. The information relating to the errors is only accessible after a
cold restart (see system word %SW124). In general, the information is not used by
the user, only the information H’80’ and H’81’ can be used to diagnose a cabling
error on the bus X.
209
TSX P57/TSX H57 processors: diagnostics
210
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57 103 processor
14
General characteristics of TSX P 57 103 processors
TSX P 57 103
processors
35011052.06 07/2008
The following table gives the general characteristics of the TSX P 57 103 processor.
Reference
TSX P 57 103
Maximum
configuration
Maximum number of TSX RKY 12EX racks
2
Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX
racks
4
Maximum number with TSXRKY 12EX
of slots
with TSXRKY 4EX, 6EX, 8EX
21
27
211
TSX P57 103 processor
Reference
TSX P 57 103
Functions
I/O profile (1)
fixed
Maximum number In-rack discrete I/O
of channels
In-rack analog I/O
512
Applications (counting, axis,
etc.)
24
8
Maximum number Built-in UNI-TELWAY (terminal 1
of connections
port, Ethernet)
Network (ETHWAY, FIPWAY,
Modbus Plus)
1
Master FIPIO (built-in)
-
Third party field bus
-
AS-i field bus
Savable real-time clock
Memory
capacity
Application
structure
2
yes
Processor internal RAM
32K16
PCMCIA memory Application area
card (maximum
Symbol Zone
capacity)
File area
64K16
Master task
1
Fast task
1
128K16
Event processing (of which 1 has priority)
32
Application
code execution
time for a 1K
instruction
Internal RAM
100% Boolean
0.66 ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.95 ms
PCMCIA card
100% Boolean
0.85 ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
1.18 ms
System
overhead
MAST task
1.5 ms
FAST task
0.8 ms
fixed I/O profile (1): the number of discrete I/Os, and application-specific and analog
channels can be accumulated
212
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57 153 processor
15
General characteristics of TSX P57 153 processors
TSX P 57 153
processors
The following table gives the general characteristics of the TSX P 57 153 processor.
Reference
TSX P 57 153
Maximum
configuration
Maximum number of TSX RKY 12EX racks
Maximum
number of slots
Functions
with TSXRKY 12EX
21
with TSXRKY 4EX, 6EX, 8EX
27
Maximum
number of
channels
In-rack discrete I/O
512
In-rack analog I/O
24
Maximum
number of
connections
Built-in UNI-TELWAY (terminal
port)
1
Network (ETHWAY, FIPWAY,
Modbus Plus, Ethernet)
1
Master FIPIO (built-in)
63
Third party field bus
-
AS-i field bus
2
I/O profile (1)
fixed
Applications (counting, axis, etc.) 8
Savable real-time clock
35011052.06 07/2008
2
Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks 4
yes
213
TSX P57 153 processor
Reference
TSX P 57 153
Memory
capacity
Processor internal RAM
32K16
PCMCIA
memory card
(maximum
capacity)
Application area
64K16
Symbol Zone
-
File area
128K16
Application
structure
Application
code execution
time for a 1K
instruction
System
overhead
Master task
1
Fast task
1
Event processing (1 has priority)
32
Internal RAM
PCMCIA card
MAST task
FAST task
100% Boolean
0.66 ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.95 ms
100% Boolean
0.85 ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
1.18 ms
without using the FIPIO bus
1.5 ms
using the FIPIO bus
3.1 ms
0.8 ms
fixed I/O profile (1): the number of discrete I/Os, and application-specific and analog
channels can be accumulated
214
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57 203 processor
16
General characteristics of TSX P57 203 processors
TSX P 57 203
processors
The following table gives the general characteristics of the TSX P 57 203 processor.
Reference
TSX P 57 203
Maximum
configuration
Maximum number of TSX RKY 12EX racks
8
Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks
16
Maximum number of
slots
86
Functions
with TSXRKY 4EX, 6EX, 8EX
I/O profile (1)
Maximum number of
channels
Maximum number of
connections
Savable real-time clock
35011052.06 07/2008
with TSXRKY 12EX
110
fixed
In-rack discrete I/O
1024
In-rack analog I/O
80
Applications (counting, axis,
etc.)
24
Built-in UNI-TELWAY (terminal
port)
1
Network (ETHWAY, FIPWAY,
Modbus Plus, Ethernet)
1
Master FIPIO (built-in)
-
Third party field bus
1
AS-i field bus
4
yes
215
TSX P57 203 processor
Reference
TSX P 57 203
Memory
capacity
Processor internal RAM
48K16
PCMCIA memory
card (maximum
capacity)
Application area
160K16
Symbol Zone
256K16
File area
640K16 channel
0+
2048K16
channel 1
Application
structure
Master task
1
Fast task
1
Event processing (of which 1 has priority)
Application
Internal RAM
code execution
time for a 1K
PCMCIA card
instruction
System
overhead
100% Boolean
64
0.21 ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.28 ms
100% Boolean
0.27 ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.40 ms
MAST task
1 ms
FAST task
0.35 ms
fixed I/O profile (1): the number of discrete I/Os, and application-specific and analog
channels can be accumulated
216
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57 253 processor
17
General characteristics of TSX P57 253 processors
TSX P57 253
processor
The following table gives the general characteristics of the TSX P 57 253 processor.
Reference
TSX P57 253
Maximum
Maximum number of TSX RKY 12EX racks
configuration Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks
Maximum number of
slots
Functions
with TSXRKY 12EX
with TSXRKY 4EX, 6EX, 8EX
I/O profile (1)
Maximum number of
channels
8
16
86
110
fixed
In-rack discrete I/O
1024
In-rack analog I/O
80
Applications (counting, axis, etc.) 24
Maximum number of
connections
Built-in UNI-TELWAY (terminal
port)
1
Network (ETHWAY, FIPWAY,
Modbus Plus, Ethernet)
1
Master FIPIO (built-in)
127
Third party field bus
1
AS-i field bus
Savable real-time clock
35011052.06 07/2008
4
yes
217
TSX P57 253 processor
Reference
TSX P57 253
Memory
capacity
Processor internal RAM
64K16
PCMCIA memory card Application area
(maximum capacity)
Symbol Zone
160K16
File area
Application
structure
256K16
640K16
channel 0+
2048K16
channel 1
Master task
1
Fast task
1
Event processing (of which 1 has priority)
64
Application
code
execution
time for a 1K
instruction
Internal RAM
100% Boolean
0.21 ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.28 ms
PCMCIA card
100% Boolean
0.27 ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.40 ms
System
overhead
MAST task
without using the FIPIO bus
1 ms
using the FIPIO bus
1.2 ms
FAST task
0.35 ms
fixed I/O profile (1): the number of discrete I/Os, and application-specific and analog
channels can be accumulated
218
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57 2623 processor
18
TSX P57 2623 Processors: General Characteristics
TSX P 57 2623
Processors
The following table gives the general characteristics of the TSX P 57 2623
processor.
Reference
TSX P 57 2623
Maximum
configuration
Maximum number of TSX RKY 12EX racks
Maximum number
of slots
35011052.06 07/2008
8
Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks 16
with TSXRKY 12EX
86
with TSXRKY 4EX, 6EX, 8EX 110
219
TSX P57 2623 processor
Reference
TSX P 57 2623
Functions
I/O profile (1)
Maximum number
of channels
Maximum number
of connections
fixed
In-rack discrete I/O
1024
In-rack analog I/O
80
Applications (counting, axis,
etc.)
24
Built-in UNI-TELWAY
(terminal port)
1
Network (ETHWAY, FIPWAY, 1
Modbus Plus, embedded
Ethernet (2))
Master FIPIO (built-in)
-
Third party field bus
1
AS-i field bus
Memory capacity
Application
structure
Application code
execution time
for a 1K
instruction
yes
Processor internal RAM
48K16
PCMCIA memory
card (maximum
capacity)
Application area
160K16
Symbol Zone
256K16
File area
640K16 channel 0
+ 2048K16
channel 1
Master task
1
Fast task
1
Event processing (of which 1 has priority)
64
Internal RAM
100% Boolean
0.21 ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.28 ms
PCMCIA card
System overhead MAST task
FAST task
220
4
Savable real-time clock
100% Boolean
0.27 ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.40 ms
1 ms
0.35 ms
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57 2623 processor
(1) Fixed I/O profile: the number of discrete I/Os, and application-specific and analog
channels can be accumulated.
(2) One of which is occupied by the TSX ETY PORT of the CPU.
35011052.06 07/2008
221
TSX P57 2623 processor
222
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57 2823 processor
19
TSX P57 2823 Processors: General Characteristics
TSX P57 2823
Processor
35011052.06 07/2008
The following table gives the general characteristics of the TSX P 57 2823
processor.
Reference
TSX P57 2823
Maximum
configuration
Maximum number of TSX RKY 12EX racks
8
Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks
16
Maximum number of with TSXRKY 12EX
slots
with TSXRKY 4EX, 6EX, 8EX
86
110
223
TSX P57 2823 processor
Reference
TSX P57 2823
Functions
I/O profile (1)
fixed
Maximum number of In-rack discrete I/O
channels
In-rack analog I/O
1024
Applications (counting, axis,
etc.)
Maximum number of Built-in UNI-TELWAY (terminal
connections
port)
1
Network (ETHWAY, FIPWAY,
Modbus Plus, embedded
Ethernet (2))
1
Master FIPIO (built-in)
127
Third party field bus
1
AS-i field bus
4
Savable real-time clock
Memory
capacity
Application
structure
yes
Processor internal RAM
64K16
PCMCIA memory
card (maximum
capacity)
160K16
Application area
Symbol Zone
256K16
File area
640K16 channel
0 + 2048K16
channel 1
Master task
1
Fast task
1
Event processing (of which 1 has priority)
64
Application
Internal RAM
code execution
time for a 1K
PCMCIA card
instruction
224
80
24
100% Boolean
0.21 ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.28 ms
100% Boolean
0.27 ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.40 ms
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57 2823 processor
Reference
TSX P57 2823
System
overhead
MAST task
without using the FIPIO bus
1 ms
using the FIPIO bus
1.2 ms
FAST task
0.35 ms
(1) Fixed I/O profile: the number of discrete I/Os, and application-specific and analog
channels can be accumulated
(2) One of which is occupied by the TSX ETY PORT of the CPU.
35011052.06 07/2008
225
TSX P57 2823 processor
226
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57 303 processor
20
General characteristics of TSX P57 303 processors
TSX P57 303
processor
The following table gives the general characteristics of the TSX P 57 303 processor.
Reference
TSX P57 303
Maximum
configuration
Maximum number of TSX RKY 12EX racks
8
Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks
16
Maximum number of with TSXRKY 12EX
slots
with TSXRKY 4EX, 6EX, 8EX
110
I/O profile (2)
fixed
Maximum number of In-rack discrete I/O
channels
In-rack analog I/O
1024
Functions
Applications (counting, axis,
etc.)
128
32
Maximum number of Built-in UNI-TELWAY (terminal
connections
port)
1
Network (ETHWAY, FIPWAY,
Modbus Plus, Ethernet)
3
Master FIPIO (built-in)
-
Third party field bus
2
AS-i field bus
8
Savable real-time clock
35011052.06 07/2008
86
yes
227
TSX P57 303 processor
Reference
TSX P57 303
Memory
capacity
Processor internal RAM
64K16/80K16(1)
PCMCIA memory
card (maximum
capacity)
Application area
384K16
Symbol Zone
256K16
File area
640K16 channel
0 + 2048K16
channel 1
Application
structure
Master task
1
Fast task
1
Event processing (of which 1 has priority)
Application
Internal RAM
code execution
time for a 1K
PCMCIA card
instruction
System
overhead
100% Boolean
64
0.15 ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.21 ms
100% Boolean
0.22 ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.32 ms
MAST task
1 ms
FAST task
0.25 ms
(1) 1st figure when the application is in internal RAM, 2nd figure when the application
is in card memory.
fixed I/O profile (2): the number of discrete I/Os, and application-specific and analog
channels can be accumulated.
228
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57 303A processor
21
General characteristics of TSX P57 303A processors
TSX P57 303A
processor
35011052.06 07/2008
The following table gives the general characteristics of the TSX P 57 303A
processor.
Reference
TSX P57 303A
Maximum
configuration
Maximum number of TSX RKY 12EX racks
8
Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks
16
Maximum number of with TSXRKY 12EX
slots
with TSXRKY 4EX, 6EX, 8EX
110
86
229
TSX P57 303A processor
Reference
TSX P57 303A
Functions
I/O profile (2)
fixed
Maximum number of In-rack discrete I/O
channels
In-rack analog I/O
128
Applications (counting, axis,
etc.)
Memory
capacity
Application
structure
1
Network (ETHWAY, FIPWAY,
Modbus Plus, Ethernet)
3
Master FIPIO (built-in)
-
Third party field bus
2
AS-i field bus
8
Savable real-time clock
yes
Processor internal RAM
64K16/80K16(1)
PCMCIA memory
card (maximum
capacity)
Application area
384K16
Symbol Zone
256K16
File area
640K16 channel 0
+ 2048K16
channel 1
Master task
1
Fast task
1
Event processing (of which 1 has priority)
100% Boolean
64
0.15 ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.21 ms
100% Boolean
0.22 ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
230
32
Maximum number of Built-in UNI-TELWAY (terminal
connections
port)
Application
Internal RAM
code execution
time for a 1K
PCMCIA card
instruction
System
overhead
1024
0.32 ms
MAST task
1.15 ms
FAST task
0.29 ms
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57 303A processor
(1) 1st figure when the application is in internal RAM, 2nd figure when the application
is in card memory.
fixed I/O profile (2): the number of discrete I/Os, and application-specific and analog
channels can be accumulated.
35011052.06 07/2008
231
TSX P57 303A processor
232
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57 353 processor
22
General characteristics of TSX P57 353 processors
TSX P57 353
processor
The following table gives the general characteristics of the TSX P 57 353 processor.
Reference
TSX P57 353
Maximum
configuration
Maximum number of TSX RKY 12EX racks
8
Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks
16
Maximum number of
slots
with TSXRKY 12EX
86
with TSXRKY 4EX, 6EX, 8EX
110
Functions
I/O profile (2)
Maximum number of
channels
Maximum number of
connections
fixed
In-rack discrete I/O
1024
In-rack analog I/O
128
Applications (counting, axis,
etc.)
32
Built-in UNI-TELWAY (terminal
port)
1
Network (ETHWAY, FIPWAY,
Modbus Plus, Ethernet)
3
Master FIPIO (built-in)
127
Third party field bus
2
AS-i field bus
Savable real-time clock
35011052.06 07/2008
8
yes
233
TSX P57 353 processor
Reference
TSX P57 353
Memory
capacity
Processor internal RAM
80K16/96K16(1)
PCMCIA memory
card (maximum
capacity)
Application area
384K16
Symbol Zone
256K16
File area
640K16 channel 0
+ 2048K16
channel 1
Application
structure
Master task
1
Fast task
1
Event processing (of which 1 has priority)
64
Application
code
execution
time for a 1K
instruction
Internal RAM
100% Boolean
0.15ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.21ms
100% Boolean
0.22ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.32ms
System
overhead
MAST task
without using the FIPIO bus
1 ms
using the FIPIO bus
1 ms
PCMCIA card
FAST task
0.25 ms
(1) 1st figure when the application is in internal RAM, 2nd figure when the application
is in card memory.
fixed I/O profile (2): the number of discrete I/Os, and application-specific and analog
channels can be accumulated.
234
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57 353A processor
23
General characteristics of TSX P57 353A processors
TSX P57 353A
processor
35011052.06 07/2008
The following table gives the general characteristics of the TSX P 57 353A
processor.
Reference
TSX P57 353A
Maximum
configuration
Maximum number of TSX RKY 12EX racks
8
Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks
16
Maximum number of
slots
with TSXRKY 12EX
86
with TSXRKY 4EX, 6EX, 8EX
110
235
TSX P57 353A processor
Reference
TSX P57 353A
Functions
I/O profile (2)
Maximum number of
channels
Maximum number of
connections
Memory
capacity
Application
structure
1024
In-rack analog I/O
128
Applications (counting, axis,
etc.)
32
Built-in UNI-TELWAY (terminal
port)
1
Network (ETHWAY, FIPWAY,
Modbus Plus, Ethernet)
3
Master FIPIO (built-in)
127
Third party field bus
2
AS-i field bus
8
Savable real-time clock
yes
Processor internal RAM
80K16/96K16(1)
PCMCIA memory
card (maximum
capacity)
Application area
384K16
Symbol Zone
256K16
File area
640K16 channel 0
+ 2048K16
channel 1
Master task
1
Fast task
1
Event processing (of which 1 has priority)
64
Application
code
execution
time for a 1K
instruction
Internal RAM
100% Boolean
0.15ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.21ms
PCMCIA card
100% Boolean
0.22ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.32ms
System
overhead
MAST task
without using the FIPIO bus
1.15 ms
using the FIPIO bus
1.15 ms
FAST task
236
fixed
In-rack discrete I/O
0.29 ms
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57 353A processor
(1) 1st figure when the application is in internal RAM, 2nd figure when the application
is in card memory.
fixed I/O profile (2): the number of discrete I/Os, and application-specific and analog
channels can be accumulated.
35011052.06 07/2008
237
TSX P57 353A processor
238
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57 353LA Processor
24
General Characteristics of TSX P57 353LA Processors
TSX P57 353LA
Processor
35011052.06 07/2008
The following table gives the general characteristics of the TSX P 57 353LA
processor.
Reference
TSX P57 353LA
Maximum
configuration
Maximum number of TSX RKY 12EX racks
8
Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks
16
Maximum number of
slots
with TSXRKY 12EX
86
with TSXRKY 4EX, 6EX, 8EX
110
239
TSX P57 353LA Processor
Reference
TSX P57 353LA
Functions
I/O profile (2)
Maximum number of
channels
Maximum number of
connections
Memory
capacity
Application
structure
In-rack discrete I/O
1024
In-rack analog I/O
128
Applications (counting, axis,
etc.)
32
Built-in UNI-TELWAY (terminal
port)
1
Network (ETHWAY, FIPWAY,
Modbus Plus, Ethernet)
3
Master FIPIO (built-in)
127
Third party field bus
2
AS-i field bus
8
Savable real-time clock
yes
Processor internal RAM
80K16/96K16(1)
PCMCIA memory
card (maximum
capacity)
Application area
384K16
Symbol Zone
256K16
File area
640K16 channel 0
+ 2048K16
channel 1
Master task
1
Fast task
1
Event processing (of which 1 has priority)
64
Application
code
execution
time for a 1K
instruction
Internal RAM
100% Boolean
0.21 ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.28 ms
PCMCIA card
100% Boolean
0.27 ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.40 ms
System
overhead
MAST task
FAST task
240
fixed
without using the FIPIO bus
1 ms
using the FIPIO bus
1.2 ms
0.35 ms
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57 353LA Processor
(1) 1st figure when the application is in internal RAM, 2nd figure when the application
is in card memory.
fixed I/O profile (2): the number of discrete I/Os, and application-specific and analog
channels can be accumulated.
35011052.06 07/2008
241
TSX P57 353LA Processor
242
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57 3623 processor
25
TSX P57 3623 Processors: General Characteristics
TSX P57 3623
Processor
The following table gives the general characteristics of the TSX P 57 3623
processor.
Reference
TSX P57 3623
Maximum
Maximum number of TSX RKY 12EX racks
configuration Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks
Maximum number of with TSXRKY 12EX
slots
with TSXRKY 4EX, 6EX, 8EX
35011052.06 07/2008
8
16
86
110
243
TSX P57 3623 processor
Reference
TSX P57 3623
Functions
I/O profile (2)
fixed
Maximum number of In-rack discrete I/O
channels
In-rack analog I/O
1024
128
Applications (counting, axis, etc.) 32
Memory
capacity
Application
structure
244
Maximum number of Built-in UNI-TELWAY (terminal
connections
port)
1
Network (ETHWAY, FIPWAY,
Modbus Plus, embedded
Ethernet (3))
3
Master FIPIO (built-in)
-
Third party field bus
2
AS-i field bus
8
Savable real-time clock
yes
Processor internal RAM
80K16/96K16(1)
PCMCIA memory
card (maximum
capacity)
Application area
384K16
Symbol Zone
256K16
File area
640K16 channel
0 + 2048K16
channel 1
Master task
1
Fast task
1
Event processing (of which 1 has priority)
64
Application
code
execution
time for a 1K
instruction
Internal RAM
100% Boolean
0.15 ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.21 ms
PCMCIA card
100% Boolean
0.22 ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.32 ms
System
overhead
MAST task
1 ms
FAST task
0.25 ms
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57 3623 processor
(1) 1st figure when the application is in internal RAM, 2nd figure when the application
is in card memory.
(2) Fixed I/O profile: the number of discrete I/Os, and application-specific and analog
channels can be accumulated.
(3) One of which is occupied by the TSX ETY PORT of the CPU.
35011052.06 07/2008
245
TSX P57 3623 processor
246
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57 3623A processor
26
TSX P57 3623A Processors: General Characteristics
TSX P57 3623A
Processor
The following table gives the general characteristics of the TSX P 57 3623A
processor.
Reference
TSX P57 3623A
Maximum
Maximum number of TSX RKY 12EX racks
configuration Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks
Maximum number of with TSXRKY 12EX
slots
with TSXRKY 4EX, 6EX, 8EX
35011052.06 07/2008
8
16
86
110
247
TSX P57 3623A processor
Reference
TSX P57 3623A
Functions
I/O profile (2)
fixed
Maximum number of In-rack discrete I/O
channels
In-rack analog I/O
1024
128
Applications (counting, axis, etc.) 32
Memory
capacity
Application
structure
248
Maximum number of Built-in UNI-TELWAY (terminal
connections
port)
1
Network (ETHWAY, FIPWAY,
Modbus Plus, embedded
Ethernet (3))
3
Master FIPIO (built-in)
-
Third party field bus
2
AS-i field bus
8
Savable real-time clock
yes
Processor internal RAM
80K16/96K16(1)
PCMCIA memory
card (maximum
capacity)
Application area
384K16
Symbol Zone
256K16
File area
640K16 channel
0 + 2048K16
channel 1
Master task
1
Fast task
1
Event processing (of which 1 has priority)
64
Application
code
execution
time for a 1K
instruction
Internal RAM
100% Boolean
0.15 ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.21 ms
PCMCIA card
100% Boolean
0.22 ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.32 ms
System
overhead
MAST task
1.15 ms
FAST task
0.29 ms
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57 3623A processor
(1) 1st figure when the application is in internal RAM, 2nd figure when the application
is in card memory.
(2) Fixed I/O profile: the number of discrete I/Os, and application-specific and analog
channels can be accumulated.
(3) One of which is occupied by the TSX ETY PORT of the CPU.
35011052.06 07/2008
249
TSX P57 3623A processor
250
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57 453 processor
27
General characteristics of TSX P57 453 processors
TSX P57 453
processor
The following table gives the general characteristics of the TSX P 57 453 processor.
Reference
TSX P57 453
Maximum
configuration
Maximum number of TSX RKY 12EX racks
8
Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks
16
Maximum number of
slots
with TSXRKY 12EX
86
with TSXRKY 4EX, 6EX, 8EX
110
Functions
I/O profile (2)
Maximum number of
channels
Maximum number of
connections
flexible
In-rack discrete I/O
2048
In-rack analog I/O
256
Applications (counting, axis,
etc.)
64
Built-in UNI-TELWAY
(terminal port)
1
Network (ETHWAY, FIPWAY,
Modbus Plus, Ethernet)
4
Master FIPIO (built-in)
127
Third party field bus
2
AS-i field bus
8
Savable real-time clock
35011052.06 07/2008
yes
251
TSX P57 453 processor
Reference
TSX P57 453
Memory
capacity
Processor internal RAM
96K16/176K16(1)
PCMCIA memory
card (maximum
capacity)
Application area
512K16
Symbol Zone
256K16
File area
640K16 channel 0
+ 2048K16 channel
1
Application
structure
Master task
1
Fast task
1
Event processing (of which 1 has priority)
64
Application
code
execution
time for a 1K
instruction
Internal RAM
100% Boolean
0.07ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.11ms
PCMCIA card
100% Boolean
0.07ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.11ms
System
overhead
MAST task
1 ms
FAST task
0.20 ms
(1) 1st figure when the application is in internal RAM, 2nd figure when the application
is in card memory.
flexible I/O profile (2): the maximum number of discrete I/Os, and applicationspecific and analog channels cannot be accumulated. These area distributed
according to a formula.
252
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57 453A processor
28
General characteristics of TSX P57 453A processors
TSX P57 453A
processor
35011052.06 07/2008
The following table gives the general characteristics of the TSX P 57 453A
processor.
Reference
TSX P57 453A
Maximum
configuration
Maximum number of TSX RKY 12EX racks
8
Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks
16
Maximum number of
slots
with TSXRKY 12EX
86
with TSXRKY 4EX, 6EX, 8EX
110
253
TSX P57 453A processor
Reference
TSX P57 453A
Functions
I/O profile (2)
Maximum number of
channels
Maximum number of
connections
Memory
capacity
Application
structure
254
flexible
In-rack discrete I/O
2048
In-rack analog I/O
256
Applications (counting, axis,
etc.)
64
Built-in UNI-TELWAY
(terminal port)
1
Network (ETHWAY, FIPWAY,
Modbus Plus, Ethernet)
4
Master FIPIO (built-in)
127
Third party field bus
2
AS-i field bus
8
Savable real-time clock
yes
Processor internal RAM
96K16/176K16(1)
PCMCIA memory
card (maximum
capacity)
Application area
512K16
Symbol Zone
256K16
File area
640K16 channel 0
+ 2048K16 channel
1
Master task
1
Fast task
1
Event processing (of which 1 has priority)
64
Application
code
execution
time for a 1K
instruction
Internal RAM
100% Boolean
0.07ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.11ms
PCMCIA card
100% Boolean
0.07ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.11ms
System
overhead
MAST task
1.15 ms
FAST task
0.23 ms
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57 453A processor
(1) 1st figure when the application is in internal RAM, 2nd figure when the application
is in card memory.
flexible I/O profile (2): the maximum number of discrete I/Os, and applicationspecific and analog channels cannot be accumulated. These area distributed
according to a formula.
35011052.06 07/2008
255
TSX P57 453A processor
256
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57 4823 processor
29
TSX P57 4823 Processors: General Characteristics
TSX P57 4823
Processor
35011052.06 07/2008
The following table gives the general characteristics of the TSX P 57 4823
processor.
Reference
TSX P57 4823
Maximum
configuration
Maximum number of TSX RKY 12EX racks
8
Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks
16
Maximum number of with TSXRKY 12EX
slots
with TSXRKY 4EX, 6EX, 8EX
86
110
257
TSX P57 4823 processor
Reference
TSX P57 4823
Functions
I/O profile (2)
flexible
Maximum number of In-rack discrete I/O
channels
In-rack analog I/O
2048
Applications (counting, axis,
etc.)
256
64
Maximum number of Built-in UNI-TELWAY (terminal
connections
port)
1
Network (ETHWAY, FIPWAY,
Modbus Plus, embedded
Ethernet (3))
4
FIPIO master (built-in), number 127
of devices
Memory
capacity
Application
structure
Application
code
execution
time for a 1K
instruction
258
Third party field bus
2
AS-i field bus
8
Savable real-time clock
yes
Processor internal RAM
96K16/176K16(1)
PCMCIA memory
card (maximum
capacity)
512K16
Application area
Symbol Zone
256K16
File area
640K16 channel 0
+ 2048K16
channel 1
Master task
1
Fast task
1
Event processing (of which 1 has priority)
64
Internal RAM
PCMCIA card
100% Boolean
0.07ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.11ms
100% Boolean
0.07ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.11ms
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57 4823 processor
Reference
TSX P57 4823
System
overhead
MAST task
1 ms
FAST task
0.19 ms
(1) 1st figure when the application is in internal RAM, 2nd figure when the application
is in card memory.
(2) Flexible I/O profile: the maximum number of discrete I/Os, and applicationspecific and analog channels cannot be accumulated. These area distributed
according to a formula.
(3) One of which is occupied by the TSX ETY PORT of the CPU.
35011052.06 07/2008
259
TSX P57 4823 processor
260
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57 4823A processor
30
TSX P57 4823A Processors: General Characteristics
TSX P57 4823A
Processor
35011052.06 07/2008
The following table gives the general characteristics of the TSX P 57 4823A
processor.
Reference
TSX P57 4823A
Maximum
configuration
Maximum number of TSX RKY 12EX racks
8
Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks
16
Maximum number of with TSXRKY 12EX
slots
with TSXRKY 4EX, 6EX, 8EX
86
110
261
TSX P57 4823A processor
Reference
TSX P57 4823A
Functions
I/O profile (2)
flexible
Maximum number of In-rack discrete I/O
channels
In-rack analog I/O
2048
Applications (counting, axis,
etc.)
256
64
Maximum number of Built-in UNI-TELWAY (terminal
connections
port)
1
Network (ETHWAY, FIPWAY,
Modbus Plus, embedded
Ethernet (3))
4
FIPIO master (built-in), number 127
of devices
Memory
capacity
Application
structure
Application
code
execution
time for a 1K
instruction
262
Third party field bus
2
AS-i field bus
8
Savable real-time clock
yes
Processor internal RAM
96K16/176K16(1)
PCMCIA memory
card (maximum
capacity)
512K16
Application area
Symbol Zone
256K16
File area
640K16 channel 0
+ 2048K16
channel 1
Master task
1
Fast task
1
Event processing (of which 1 has priority)
64
Internal RAM
PCMCIA card
100% Boolean
0.07ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.11ms
100% Boolean
0.07ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.11ms
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX P57 4823A processor
Reference
TSX P57 4823A
System
overhead
MAST task
1.15 ms
FAST task
0.22 ms
(1) 1st figure when the application is in internal RAM, 2nd figure when the application
is in card memory.
(2) Flexible I/O profile: the maximum number of discrete I/Os, and applicationspecific and analog channels cannot be accumulated. These area distributed
according to a formula.
(3) One of which is occupied by the TSX ETY PORT of the CPU.
35011052.06 07/2008
263
TSX P57 4823A processor
264
35011052.06 07/2008
Premium TSX P57/TSX H57
processor: general
characteristics
31
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
The aim of this Chapter is to introduce the characteristics of devices that can be
used when installing a TSX P57/TSX H57 station.
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
35011052.06 07/2008
Topic
Page
Electrical Characteristics of TSX P57 Processors
266
Configuration of Premium PL7 Processors
268
Devices which can be connected to or built into the processor
269
Defining and counting application-specific channels
270
265
Premium TSX P57/TSX H57 processor: general characteristics
Electrical Characteristics of TSX P57 Processors
General
As the processors can be fitted with certain devices which do not have their own
power supply, the consumption of these devices must be taken into account when
establishing a global breakdown of power consumption.
Devices without their own power supply which can be connected to the terminal
port:
z adjustment terminal: T FTX 117 ADJUST,
z TSX P ACC01 unit for connecting to the UNI-TELWAY bus.
z Devices without their own power supply which can be built into the processor:
z PCMCIA communication cards TSX FPP 10/20,
z PCMCIA communication card TSX SCP 111/112/114,
z PCMCIA communication card TSX MBP 100,
z
Power
Consumption
266
This table shows the consumption of the TSX PSY supply module at 5VDC:
Processor + PCMCIA
memory card
Typical consumption
Maximum consumption
TSX P57 103
440 mA
610 mA
TSX P57 153
530 mA
740 mA
TSX P57 203
750 mA
1050 mA
TSX P57 253/353LA
820 mA
1140 mA
TSX P57 2623
1110 mA
1450 mA
TSX P57 2823
1180 mA
1540 mA
TSX P57 303/303A
1000 mA
1400 mA
TSX P57 353/353A
1060 mA
1480 mA
TSX P57 3623/3623A
1360 mA
1800 mA
TSX P57 453/453A
1080 mA
1510 mA
TSX P57 4823/4823A
1440 mA
1910 mA
35011052.06 07/2008
Premium TSX P57/TSX H57 processor: general characteristics
Dissipated
Power
35011052.06 07/2008
This table states the dissipated power for TSX P57 processors:
Processor + PCMCIA
memory card
typical
maximum
TSX P57 103
2.2 W
3.1 W
TSX P57 153
2.7 W
3.7 W
TSX P57 203
3.8 W
5.3 W
TSX P57 253/353LA
4.1 W
5.7 W
TSX P57 2623
5.6 W
7.4 W
TSX P57 2823
5.9 W
7.8 W
TSX P57 303/303A
5.0 W
7.0 W
TSX P57 353/353A
5.3 W
7.4 W
TSX P57 3623/3623A
6.8 W
9.1 W
TSX P57 453/453A
5.4 W
7.6 W
TSX P57 4823/4823A
7.2 W
9.7 W
267
Premium TSX P57/TSX H57 processor: general characteristics
Configuration of Premium PL7 Processors
Specifications
A Premium processor comprises:
z
z
selection of processor
a dedicated command control processor.
The following table gives the general characteristics of the TSXP570244
processors:
TSXP57454
processor
Original processor
TSX P57 103
-
General usage
Dedicated command
processor frequency
control processor
(MHz)
-
SONIX
Frequency of the
dedicated command
control processor
(MHz).
48
TSX P57 153
-
-
SONIX
48
TSX P57 203
INTEL or AMD 486
48
SONIX
48
TSX P57 253
INTEL or AMD 486
48
SONIX
48
TSX P57 2623
INTEL or AMD 486
48
SONIX
48
TSX P57 2823
INTEL or AMD 486
48
SONIX
48
TSX P57 303
INTEL or AMD 486
72
SONIX
48
TSX P57 303A
INTEL or AMD 486
72
SONIX
48
TSX P57 353
INTEL or AMD 486
72
SONIX
48
TSX P57 353A
INTEL or AMD 486
72
SONIX
48
TSX P57 353LA
INTEL or AMD 486
48
SONIX
48
TSX P57 3623
INTEL or AMD 486
72
SONIX
48
TSX P57 3623A
INTEL or AMD 486
72
SONIX
48
TSX P57 453
INTEL or AMD 486
96
SONIX
48
TSX P57 453A
INTEL or AMD 486
96
SONIX
48
TSX P57 4823
INTEL or AMD 486
96
SONIX
48
TSX P57 4823A
INTEL or AMD 486
96
SONIX
48
268
35011052.06 07/2008
Premium TSX P57/TSX H57 processor: general characteristics
Devices which can be connected to or built into the processor
Tables of
consumption
and dissipated
power
Consumption:
Consumption at 5VDC from the power supply module TSX
PSY …
Typical
Maximum
Devices without their own power
supply which can be connected to the
terminal port (TER)
TFTX 117 ADJUST
310mA
340 mA
TSXPACC01
150mA
250 mA
PCMCIA communication card which
can be built into the processor
TSXFPP10
330 mA
360 mA
TSXFPP20
330 mA
360 mA
TSXSCP111
140 mA
300 mA
TSXSCP112
120 mA
300 mA
TSXSCP114
150 mA
300 mA
TSXMBP100
220 mA
310 mA
Dissipated power:
Dissipated power
35011052.06 07/2008
Typical
Maximum
Devices without their own power
supply which can be connected to
the terminal port (TER)
TFTX 117 ADJUST
1.5 W
1.7 W
TSXPACC01
0.5 W
1.25 W
PCMCIA communication card which
can be built into the processor
TSXFPP10
1.65 W
1.8 W
TSXFPP20
1.65 W
1.8 W
TSXSCP111
0.7 W
1.5 W
TSXSCP112
0.6 W
1.5 W
TSXSCP114
0.75 W
1.5 W
TSXMBP100
1.1 W
1.55 W
269
Premium TSX P57/TSX H57 processor: general characteristics
Defining and counting application-specific channels
Summary table
Applications:
Application
Module/card
Counting
Movement control
Applicationspecific
channels
Number
TSXCTY2A
Yes
2
TSXCTY2C
Yes
2
TSXCTY4A
Yes
4
TSXCAY21
Yes
2
TSXCAY41
Yes
4
TSXCAY22
Yes
2
TSXCAY42
Yes
4
TSXCAY33
Yes
3
TSXCSY84
Yes
32
Step by step control
TSXCFY11
Yes
1
TSXCFY21
Yes
2
Weighing
TSXISPY100
Yes
2
TSXSCP11. in the
processor
No
0(*)
TSXSCP11. in the
TSXSCY21.
Yes
1
TSXSCP11. in the
TSXSCY21.
Yes
1
TSXSCY 21 (built-in
channel)
Yes
1
FIPIO agent
TSXFPP10 in the processor
No
0(*)
Master FIPIO
Built into the processor
No
0(*)
Communication Serial link
(*) Although these channels are application-specific, they should not be taken into
account when calculating the maximum number of application-specific channels
which can be supported by the processor.
Note: Only channels configured from PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro software can be
counted.
270
35011052.06 07/2008
Processor performance
32
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
This Chapter describes processor performance.
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
35011052.06 07/2008
Topic
Page
MAST task cycle time: introduction
272
MAST Task Cycle Time: Program Processing Ppt
273
MAST Task Cycle Time: Input/Output Internal Processing
275
Example of the calculation of cycle times of a MAST task under the following
conditions
279
FAST Task Cycle Time
281
Event Response Time
282
271
Processor performance
MAST task cycle time: introduction
Explanatory
diagram
The following diagram describes the MAST task cycle time:
Program processing
I.P
on output
I.P
on input
cycle time
IP = internal
MAST CYCLE TIME = Program processing time (Ppt) + input/output internal
processing time (Ipt):
272
35011052.06 07/2008
Processor performance
MAST Task Cycle Time: Program Processing Ppt
Definition of Ppt
Program
Processing Time
Ppt = Application code execution time (Apcet) + Grafcet overhead time (OtG7).
Application Code
Execution Time
(Apcet)
Apcet = sum of the times of each instruction carried out by the application program
in each cycle.
The execution time of each instruction as well as the type of application which was
used to check them are given in the PL7 reference manual.
The table opposite gives the execution times in milliseconds (ms) for a 1K instruction
(1024 instructions):
Processors
Application code execution time Apcet (1)
Internal RAM
PCMCIA card
100% Boolean 65% Boolean + 100% Boolean 65% Boolean +
35% numerical
35% numerical
TSX P57 103
TSX P57 153
0.66 ms
0.95 ms
0.83 ms
1.18 ms
TSX P57 2•3/2•23/
353LA
TPCX 57 203
0.21 ms
0.28 ms
0.27 ms
0.40 ms
TSX P57 3•3/3•3A/
3623/3623A
TPCX 57 353
0.15 ms
0.21 ms
0.22 ms
0.32 ms
TSX P57 453/453A/
4823/4823A
0.07 ms
0.11 ms
0.07 ms
0.11 ms
(1) with all the instructions executed in each PLC cycle.
35011052.06 07/2008
273
Processor performance
Grafcet
Overhead Time
(OtG7)
OtG7 = GFT + (AST x number of simultaneous active steps) + (OTT x number of
transitions occurring simultaneously).
Summary table:
Processors
GFT
AST
OTT
TSX P57 103
TSX P57 153
0.243 ms
0.088 ms
0.359 ms
TSX P57 2•3/2•23/353LA
TPCX 57 203
0.075 ms
0.029 ms
0.109 ms
TSX P57 3•3/3•3A/3623/3623A
TPCX 57,353
0.047 ms/ 0.054
ms (A)
0.018 ms/ 0.021
ms (A)
0.069 ms/ 0.079
ms (A)
TSX P57 453/453A//4823/4823A
0.039 ms/ 0.045
ms (A)
0.015 ms/ 0.017
ms (A)
0.058 ms/ 0.067
ms (A)
GFT: Grafcet time
AST: active step time
OTT: occurring transition time
274
35011052.06 07/2008
Processor performance
MAST Task Cycle Time: Input/Output Internal Processing
Definition of
Input and Output
Internal
Processing Time
(Ipt)
MAST task overhead system time (Mtost)
+
max [receiving communication system Time (rcomT); management
time on input of implicit I/O %I (mTi%I)]
Ipt =
+
max [sending communication system Time (scomT); management time
on output of implicit I/O %Q (Mto%Q)]
MAST Task
Overhead
System Time
(Mtost)
35011052.06 07/2008
Summary table:
Processors
Time without FIPIO
application
Time with FIPIO
application
TSX 57 103
1.5 ms
-
TSX 57 153
1.5 ms
3.1 ms
TSX P57 203 / 2623
TPCX 57 203
1 ms
-
TSX P57 253/2823/353LA
1 ms
1.2 ms
TSX P57 303/303A/3623/3623A
1 ms/ 1.15 ms (A)
-
TSX P57 353/353A
TPCX 57 353
1 ms/ 1.15 ms (A)
1 ms/ 1.15 ms (A)
TSX P57 453/453A/4823/4823A
1 ms/ 1.15 ms (A)
1 ms/ 1.15 ms (A)
275
Processor performance
Management
Time on Input/
Output of Implicit
I/O %I and %Q
mTi%I = 60 micro seconds + sum of the IN times of each module.
mTo%Q = 60 micro seconds + sum of the OUT times of each module.
Management time on input (IN) and on output (OUT) for each module:
Type of module
Management time
On input (IN)
On output (OUT)
Total (IN+OUT)
8 channel discrete inputs
27 μs
-
27 μs
16 channel discrete inputs
(all modules except TSX DEY 16FK)
27 μs
-
27 μs
32 channel discrete inputs
48 μs
-
48 μs
64 channel discrete inputs
96 μs
-
96 μs
Fast discrete inputs (8 channels used)
(module TSX DEY 16FK/TSXDMY 28FK)
29 μs
16 μs
45 μs
Fast discrete inputs (16 channels used)
(module TSX DEY 16FK/TSXDMY 28FK/
28RFK)
37 μs
22 μs
59 μs
8 channel discrete outputs
26 μs
15 μs
41 μs
16 channel discrete outputs
33 μs
20 μs
53 μs
32 channel discrete outputs
47 μs
30 μs
77 μs
64 channel discrete outputs
94 μs
60 μs
154 μs
Analog inputs (in groups of 4 channels)
84 μs
-
84 μs
Analog outputs (4 channels)
59 μs
59 μs
118 μs
Counting (TSX CTY 2A/4A), by channel
55 μs
20 μs
75 μs
Counting (TSX CTY 2C), by channel
65 μs
21 μs
86 μs
Step by step control (TSX CFY ..), by channel
75 μs
20 μs
95 μs
Axis control (TSX CAY ..), by channel
85 μs
22 μs
107 μs
Note: Discrete input/output module times are given in the theory that all channels
of the module are assigned to the same task.
Example: using module TSX DEY 32 D2 K
z if the 32 channels are assigned to the same task, use the «32 channel discrete
inputs» time,
z if only 16 channels are assigned to the same task, use the «16 channel discrete
inputs» time and not the «32 channel discrete input» time divided by 2.
276
35011052.06 07/2008
Processor performance
Communication
System Time
Communication (except telegram) is made during MAST task «Internal Processing»
phases:
z
z
on input for receiving messages (rcomT),
on outputs for sending messages (scomT).
The MAST task cycle time is therefore affected by communication traffic.
Communication time through each cycle varies considerably according to:
traffic generated by the processor: the number of simultaneously active
communication EF,
z traffic generated from other devices to the processor or for which the processor
provides a traffic routing function like the master.
z
This time only occurs in the cycles where there is a new message to be managed.
Examples of
Communication
System Time
Terminal connected to PL7 Junior software and open animation table
Processors
Average time per cycle
Maximum time per cycle
TSX P57 103 / 153
2.5 ms
3.5 ms
TSX P57 2•3/2•23/353LA
TPCX 57 203
2 ms
2.5 ms
TSX P57 3•3/3•3A/3623/3623A
TPCX 57 353
1.3 ms / 1.4 ms (A)
1.8 ms / 2.1 ms (A)
TSX P57 453/453A/4823/4823A
1 ms / 1.1 ms (A)
1.5 ms / 1.7 ms (A)
1 OF SEND_RQ (mirror request, 100 characters)
Instruction execution time: 0.5 ms (for a TSX P57 203 processor), to be included in
the application code execution time for cycles where the EF is executed in real-time.
35011052.06 07/2008
277
Processor performance
Communication
System Time
Data table:
Processors
Sending time
Receiving time
TSX P57 103 / 153
800 μs
800 μs
TSX P57 2•3/2•23/353LA
TPCX 57 203
220 μs
220 μs
TSX P57 3•3/3•3A/3623/3623A
TPCX 57 353
150 μs / 170 μs (A)
150 μs / 170 μs (A)
TSX P57 453/453A/4823/4823A
120 μs / 140 μs (A)
120 μs / 140 μs (A)
Note: These times cannot be combined in the same cycle. Transmission occurs in
the same cycle as instruction execution as long as communication traffic remains
light, but the reply is not received in the same cycle.
278
35011052.06 07/2008
Processor performance
Example of the calculation of cycle times of a MAST task under the following
conditions
Introduction
An application with the following characteristics:
TSX P57 203 processor,
Execution of a program in PLC internal RAM,
z 10 K instructions: 65% Boolean + 35% numerical,
z 1 OF communication type SEND_REQ,
z 128 discrete inputs distributed over: 7 TSX DEY 16D2 modules + 1 TSX DEY
16FK module,
z 80 discrete outputs distributed over: 5 TSX DSY 16T2 modules,
z 32 analog inputs distributed over: 2 TSX AEY 1600 modules,
z 16 analog outputs distributed over: 4 TSX ASY 410 modules,
z 2 counting channels distributed over: 1 TSX CTY 2A module.
z
z
Calculation of
the different
times
Application code execution time (APCET):
z
z
without communication OF: 10 x 0.28 = 2.8 ms
with 1 OF of SEND_REQ type communication (execution of an EF = 2 ms) =
(10x0.28) + 2 = 4.8 ms
Overhead system time (Ost) = 1ms
Input and output management time for implicit I/O %I and %Q:
Module product
references
Module type
Number of modules
Input management
time (IN)
Output management
time (OUT)
TSX DEY 16D2
16 channel discrete
inputs
7
238 micro seconds
-
TSX DEY 16 FK
16 channel discrete
inputs (fast inputs)
1
37 micro seconds
22 micro seconds
TSX DSY 16T2
16 channel discrete
outputs
5
165 micro seconds
100 micro seconds
TSX AEY 1600
Analog inputs
2 (32 channels)
672 micro seconds
-
TSX ASY 410
Analog outputs
4 (16 channels)
236 micro seconds
236 micro seconds
TSX CTY 2A
Counting
1 (2 channels)
110 micro seconds
40 micro seconds
1458 micro seconds
398 micro seconds
Total management time
Input management time: Imt%I = 60 microseconds + 1458 microseconds = 1518
microseconds = 1.52 ms.
35011052.06 07/2008
279
Processor performance
Output management time: Omt%Q = 60 microseconds +398 microseconds = 458
microseconds = 0.46 ms.
Communication system time:
z
z
Sending a request: scomT = 0.22 ms,
Receiving the reply: rcomT = 0.22 ms.
Cycle time without execution of the communication OF
TcyM = Apcet + Most + Imt%I + Omt%Q
= 2.8 ms +1 ms + 1.52 ms + 0.46 ms
= 5.78 ms
Cycle time with execution of the communication OF and sending of the
request
McyT = Apcet + Texec EF + Most +Imt%I + Omt%Q + scomT
= 2.8 ms + 2 ms + 1 ms + 1.52 ms + 0.46 ms + 0.22ms = 8 ms
Cycle time with reception of reply
Mcyt = Apcet + Texec EF + Most +Imt%I + Omt%Q + rcomT
= 2.8 ms + 2 ms + 1 ms + 1.52 ms + 0.46 ms + 0.22ms = 8 ms
280
35011052.06 07/2008
Processor performance
FAST Task Cycle Time
Definition
FAST cycle time = Program processing time (Ppt) + input and output internal
processing time (Ipt).
Definition of Ppt
Program
Processing Time
Ppt = Application code execution time relative to the FAST (Apcet).
Definition of
Input and Output
Internal
Processing Time
(Ipt)
Ipt = FAST task overhead system time + input and output management time for
implicit I/O %I and %Q.
Application code execution time: see Application Code Execution Time (Apcet),
p. 273.
FAST task overhead system time (FosT)
Processors
FAST task overhead system time
TSX P57 103
PCX 57 203
0.8 ms
TSX P57 2•3/2•23/353LA
TSX P57 3•3/3•3A/3623/3623A
PCX 57 353
0.6 ms/ 0.69 ms (A)
TSX P57 453/453A/4823/4823A
0.2 ms / 0.23 ms (A)
Input and output management time for implicit I/O %I and %Q: see MAST Task
Cycle Time: Input/Output Internal Processing, p. 275.
35011052.06 07/2008
281
Processor performance
Event Response Time
General
Definition: time between an edge on an event input and the corresponding edge on
an output positioned by the program in the event task.
Example: program with 100 Boolean instructions and input module TSX DEY 16 FK
Processors
Response time
Module TSX DSY 08T22
Module TSX DSY 32T2K
Minimum
Typical
Maximum
Minimum
Typical
Maximum
TSX P57 103
PCX 57 203
1.2 ms
1.3 ms
2.8 ms
1.9 ms
2.4 ms
4.2 ms
TSX P57 2•3/2•23/353LA
TSX P57 3•3/3•3A/3623/3623A
PCX 57 353
1 ms / 1.1
ms (A)
1.1 ms / 1.2 2.2 ms / 2.4 1.8 ms / 2
ms (A)
ms (A)
ms (A)
2.2 ms / 2.4
ms (A)
3.7 ms / 4.1
ms (A)
TSX P57 453/453A/4823/4823A
0.7 ms /
0.8 ms / 0.9 0.8 ms / 0.9 1.5 ms / 1.7 1.9 ms / 2.1
0.8 ms (A) ms (A)
ms (A)
ms (A)
ms (A)
2.1 ms / 2.3
ms (A)
282
35011052.06 07/2008
Atrium PCX 57 processors
IV
At a Glance
Aim of this Part
The aim of this Part is to describe PCX 57 processors and their installation.
What's in this
Part?
This part contains the following chapters:
35011052.06 07/2008
Chapter
Chapter Name
Page
33
PCX 57 Processors: introduction
285
34
PCX 57 Processors: installation
295
35
PCX 57 processors: Diagnostics
317
36
PCX 57 203 processor
329
37
PCX 57 353 processor
331
38
Atrium PCX 57 CPU: general characteristics
333
283
Atrium PCX 57 processors
284
35011052.06 07/2008
PCX 57 Processors: introduction
33
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
The aim of this Chapter is to introduce PCX 57 processors.
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
35011052.06 07/2008
Topic
Page
General introduction
286
Physical description of PCX 57 processors
288
Real-time clock
290
Dimensions of PCX 57 processor cards
291
The different components of a PCX 57 card
292
285
PCX 57 Processors: introduction
General introduction
At a Glance
Integrated into a host PC (1) running Windows 95/98/2000 or Windows NT with a
16-bit ISA bus, PCX 57 processors manage, using PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro software,
a complete PLC station made up of racks, discrete input/output modules, analog
input/output modules and application modules, which can be distributed over one or
more racks connected to an bus X.
Note: The PCX 57 processor communicates with the PC in which it is installed via
the 16-bit ISA bus. To do this, a communication driver (ISAWAY 95/98/2000 or
ISAWAY NY must be installed.
Illustration
PCX 57 processor
Host PC
Two types of processor are available to meet your different requirements:
PCX 57 203 processor: a processor with specifications and performance
identical to the TSX P57 203 processor,
z PCX 57 353 processor: a processor with specifications and performance
identical to the TSX P57 353 processor.
z
286
35011052.06 07/2008
PCX 57 Processors: introduction
Characteristics
of the host PC
To support a PCX 57 processor, the host PC must:
operate under Windows 95/98 or Windows NT,
have a 16-bit 8 MHz ISA bus,
z have two standard slots available on the ISA bus (consecutive and 20.32mm
apart), of sufficient height and width.
As the shape of the PCX 57 processor card is exactly the same as the shape of
a 16-bit ISA PC card,
z the host PC must respond to ISA norms (signals, power supply, etc.).
z
z
Note: (1) the term "host PC" means a Schneider Electric industrial PC or any other
office PC that has the characteristics defined above.
35011052.06 07/2008
287
PCX 57 Processors: introduction
Physical description of PCX 57 processors
Illustration
288
This diagram labels the different components of a PCX 57 processor module
35011052.06 07/2008
PCX 57 Processors: introduction
Description
This table describes the components of a processor module:
Number
1
Function
RUN, TER, BAT, I/O and FIP LEDs for signaling (the FIP LED is only present on
the TPCX 57 353 model).
2
Slot for a PCMCIA type 1 memory extension card.
3
Micro-switches for coding the module’s position on the rack.
4
Micro-switches for coding the rack address on the bus X.
5
Slot for a PCMCIA type 3 communication card.
6
Female 9-pin SUB D connector used to extend the bus X to an extendable rack.
7
Terminal port (TER Connector (8-pin mini-DIN)): this is used to connect an FTX
type or PC compatible terminal, or to connect the PLC to the UNI-TELWAY bus
through the TSX P ACC 01 insulation unit. This connector is used to supply 5V
to the peripheral which is linked to it (limited by the available current provided by
the PC’s power supply).
8
Recessed RESET button which leads to a cold startup of the PLC, when it is
activated.
z Processor working normally: cold startup in STOP or RUN mode,
according to the procedure defined in the configuration,
z Processor error: forced startup in STOP mode.
9
ERR LED.
10
Male 9-pin SUB D connector for linking up to a master FIPIO bus. This
connector is only present on TSX P57 353 processors.
11
16-bit ISA connector, used for linking up to the host PC.
12
Micro-switches for coding the PCX 57 processor address on the ISA bus (I/O
space).
13
Contacts for selecting the interrupt (IRQ..), used by the processor on the ISA
bus.
14
Slot for a battery which allows that the processor’s internal RAM memory to be
saved.
The RESET button must be pressed using a non-conductive object.
Note: The TER terminal port offers master UNI-TELWAY communication mode by
default, and can be configured for slave UNI-TELWAY or ASCII character mode.
35011052.06 07/2008
289
PCX 57 Processors: introduction
Real-time clock
At a Glance
PCX 57 processors have a real-time clock.
See Real-time clock, p. 153 in the TSX P57 Premium processor section.
290
35011052.06 07/2008
PCX 57 Processors: introduction
Dimensions of PCX 57 processor cards
Diagrams
The various following diagrams show the dimensions, in millimeters, of PCX 57
processor cards.
249
Note: A PCX 57 processor uses two slots on the PC ISA bus. These slots must be
adjacent and 20.32mm apart.
35011052.06 07/2008
291
PCX 57 Processors: introduction
The different components of a PCX 57 card
Illustration
This diagram shows the various components which make up a PCX 57 processor
card
1
3
4
2
5
6
292
35011052.06 07/2008
PCX 57 Processors: introduction
Table of
components and
their
descriptions
The following table gives the names and descriptions of the various components
which make up the PCX 57 processor card:
Address
Element
Description
1
PCX 57 processor
card
associated with a mechanical sub-assembly used to
house a PCMCIA type 3 communication card.
2
battery
the battery (see Changing the PCX 57 RAM memory
backup battery, p. 320) allows the processor RAM
memory to be saved, and it should be mounted in the
appropriate slot on the processor card.
3
line terminator
TSX TLYEX /B (see Line terminator TSX TLYEX, p. 105)
line terminator.
4
removable cover
a removable cover for a PCMCIA communication card
specific to the PCX 57 processor.
5
shield
shield equipped with a 9-pin SUB D connector to link a
TSX CBY..0K (see TSX CBY..0K bus X extension cable
(II ≥ 02), p. 100) bus X extension cable, and a cable for
linking to the PCX 57 processor. This accessory is for
connecting the PCX 57 processor inside a section of the
bus X.
6
daughterboard
interfaces between the above shield and the PCX 57
processor card. This accessory should be used with the
above shield. It is fitted instead of the A/ line terminator
which is built into the processor as standard.
Note: In addition to the components given above, the following are provided with
the PCX 57 card:
z diskettes containing the ISAWAY drivers and OFS software package,
z instructions for installing the PCX 57 processor.
35011052.06 07/2008
293
PCX 57 Processors: introduction
294
35011052.06 07/2008
PCX 57 Processors: installation
34
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
This Chapter deals with the installation of PCX 57 processors and the PCMCIA
extension card.
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
35011052.06 07/2008
Topic
Page
Precautions to be taken during installation
296
Physical installation of the PCX 57 processor in the PC
297
Logical installation of the PCX 57 processor on the bus X
298
Operations to be carried out before installation
301
How to configure the PCX 57 processor address on the bus X
302
How to configure the processor’s standard I/O address on the ISA bus
304
How to install the PCX 57 processor card in the PC
308
Integrating a PCX 57 processor into an bus X section
310
How to install/remove the memory extension card on the PCX 57 processor
313
Processing on insertion/extraction of a PCMCIA memory card on a PCX 57
PLC
314
Memory cards for PCX 57 processors
315
Precautions to be taken when replacing a PCX 57 processor
316
295
PCX 57 processors: installation
Precautions to be taken during installation
General
You are advised to limit charges of static electricity, which can cause significant
damage to electronic circuits. To do this the following rules should be observed:
CAUTION
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
hold the card by the edges. Do not touch the connectors or any of the circuits
that are visible,
z do not take the card out of its protective anti-static packaging before you are
ready to install it in the PC,
z ground yourself during handling, if possible,
z do not put the card on a metal surface,
z avoid unnecessary movements, as static electricity is generated by clothing,
carpets and furniture.
z
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
296
35011052.06 07/2008
PCX 57 processors: installation
Physical installation of the PCX 57 processor in the PC
General
The PCX 57 processor physically occupies two consecutive slots, slots 1 and 2, on
the ISA bus but only uses one of them, slot 1, electrically. Slot 2 is used by the
PCMCIA communication card.
Illustration
Diagram showing the principle:
Note: two PCX 57 processors can be installed in the same PC.
35011052.06 07/2008
297
PCX 57 processors: installation
Logical installation of the PCX 57 processor on the bus X
Logical
installation on
the Bus X
The PCX 57 processor logically occupies the same slot as a TSX P57 processor
(rack with address 0, position 00 or 01).
The TSX RKY••EX rack with address 0 must have a power supply module and the
position which is normally taken up by a TSX P57 processor will be unoccupied
(virtual slot for the PCX 57 processor).
Premium PLCs have two types of power supply (standard and double format). The
unoccupied position on the rack with address 0 will be depend upon the type of
power supply used.
Note:
z The slot corresponding to the PCX 57 processor address (physically free on the
rack) must not be used by another module.
z The bus X address (see How to configure the PCX 57 processor address on the
bus X, p. 302) must be configured using the micro-switches on the processor
card, so that the PCX 57 processor is aware of its address on the bus X.
298
35011052.06 07/2008
PCX 57 processors: installation
Using a standard
format power
supply module
In this case, the installation rule for the rack with address 0 is as follows:
the power supply module automatically occupies position PS,
position 00, the virtual slot for the processor, must be unoccupied,
z the other modules are installed starting at position 01.
z
z
The following diagram shows the module installation rule when a single format
power supply module is used.
TSX RKY••EX rack at address x
Rack address: 00
Address position: 00
TSX RKY••EX rack at address y
TSX RKY••EX rack at address 0
35011052.06 07/2008
299
PCX 57 processors: installation
Using a double
format power
supply module
In this case, the installation rule for the rack with address 0 is as follows:
the power supply module automatically occupies positions PS and 00,
position 01, the virtual slot for the processor, must be unoccupied,
z the other modules are installed starting from position 02.
z
z
The following diagram shows the module installation rule when a single format
power supply module is used.
TSX RKY••EX rack at address x
Rack address: 0
Address position: 01
TSX RKY••EX rack at address 0
TSX RKY••EX rack at address y
300
35011052.06 07/2008
PCX 57 processors: installation
Operations to be carried out before installation
General
Certain operations must be performed before a processor card is installed in the PC:
if necessary, insert the battery into the slot provided (see Changing the PCX 57
RAM memory backup battery, p. 320),
z if necessary, insert the PCMCIA memory card (see How to install/remove the
memory extension card on the PCX 57 processor, p. 313),
z configure the address of the processor on the bus X (see How to configure the
PCX 57 processor address on the bus X, p. 302),
z configure the processor’s standard I/O address on the ISA bus (see How to
configure the processor’s standard I/O address on the ISA bus, p. 304).
z
35011052.06 07/2008
301
PCX 57 processors: installation
How to configure the PCX 57 processor address on the bus X
General points
This address must be the same as the one which will be configured in the
configuration screen of the PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro software. This configuration is
carried out using micro-switches found on the processor card.
Rack address: the processor’s virtual slot is always situated on the rack with
address 0.
Processor position: the virtual position of the processor will depend upon the type
of power supply installed on the rack:
z
z
single format power supply: virtual position of processor = 00,
double format power supply: virtual position of processor = 01.
Default configuration:
z
z
302
rack address = 0,
module position = 00.
35011052.06 07/2008
PCX 57 processors: installation
Illustration
Explanatory diagrams:
Coding
Value
processor,
here: 00
Coding
address
rack,
here: 0
PCX
ADD
RACK
ADD
Position of the RACK ADD micro-switches in relation to the rack address:
Rack
Position of the
microswitches
PCX ADD
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Addresses not used
Position of the PCX ADD micro-switches in relation to the processor’s position on
the rack:
Position of the
00
01
processor
Position of the
microswitches
PCX ADD
35011052.06 07/2008
303
PCX 57 processors: installation
How to configure the processor’s standard I/O address on the ISA bus
General points
The PCX 57 processor uses:
z
z
eight consecutive addresses in the ISA bus’s I/O space,
an interrupt (IRQ..).
Before configuring the PCX 57 processor, it is a good idea to establish an I/O space
and an available IT in the PC using the standard utilities under Windows 95/98 or
Windows NT.
When the available resources are determined, PCX 57 is configured as follows:
z
z
the standard address of the PCX 57 processor on the ISA bus is configured,
the interrupt used by the processor on the ISA bus is configured (IRQ..).
CAUTION
IMPROPER CONFIGURATION
An improper configuration can lead to the PC malfunctioning.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
304
35011052.06 07/2008
PCX 57 processors: installation
Configuring the
standard
address of the
PCX 57
processor on the
ISA bus
This configuration is carried out using the 6 micro-switches located near the PCX
57’s ISA connector. They represent from left to right the bits with addresses SA9 to
SA4.
The address H‘220’ is configured by default.
Note: This address must be the same as the one which will be configured in the
configuration screen of the ISAWAY driver.
Illustration: the PCX 57 card and its micro-switches which are used to configure the
address
35011052.06 07/2008
305
PCX 57 processors: installation
Example of PCX
57 address
coding on the
ISA bus
This table shows various address codings
Switch
Coding
of
the address
9 8
7 6 5 4
3 2 1 0
H’000’
0
0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
H’110’
1
0 1
0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0
H’220’
2
1 0
0 0 1 0
0 0 0 0
H’330’
3
1 1
0 0 1 1
0 0 0 0
4
0 1 0 0
0 0 0 0
5
0 1 0 1
0 0 0 0
6
0 1 1 0
0 0 0 0
7
0 1 1 1
0 0 0 0
8
1 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
9
1 0 0 1
0 0 0 0
To
1 0 1 0
0 0 0 0
B
1 0 1 1
0 0 0 0
C
1 1 0 0
0 0 0 0
D
1 1 0 1
0 0 0 0
E
1 1 1 0
0 0 0 0
F
1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0
Illustration: coding using the micro-switches
306
35011052.06 07/2008
PCX 57 processors: installation
Configuring the
interrupt used by
the processor on
the ISA bus
(IRQ..)
This is configured using a jack-plug which should be placed over the interrupt to be
selected. IRQ 10 is selected by default.
Illustration: PCX 57 card with micro-switches which are used to configure the IRQ.
35011052.06 07/2008
307
PCX 57 processors: installation
How to install the PCX 57 processor card in the PC
Preliminary
conditions
Preliminary addressing operations (see Operations to be carried out before
installation, p. 301) must be performed.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
Disconnect all power before servicing equipment.
When installing the processor in the PC, the PC must always be switched off.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
308
35011052.06 07/2008
PCX 57 processors: installation
Procedure to be
followed
The following table describes the procedure for installing the processor card in the
PC:
Step
1
Action
Once the PC’s electrical power supply has been switched off, remove the
computer casing and find two free adjacent ISA slots.
As an installation constraint, the PC must conform to the following standard:
PC
20,32mm
Emplacement ISA 1
35011052.06 07/2008
Emplacement ISA 2
2
Remove the protective covers and mounting screws already in place which
correspond to the available slots.
3
Install the card in the planned free slots.
4
Fix the card to the PC by tightening the mounting screws you removed previously.
5
Place the casing back on the computer again and replace all the cables and
accessories which had to be switched off:
z Bus X cable and /B line terminator TSX TLYEX
Important: The processor switches to a blocking fault, if the line terminator /
B is not installed:
z on the PCX 57 processor, if this is not linked to a rack by a TSX CBY .. bus
X cable. . In this case, a /B line terminator (see Line terminator TSX
TLYEX, p. 105) must be installed on the processor’s bus X output.
z on the available connector of the last rack of the station, if the PCX 57
processor is linked to a rack by a TSX CBY .. bus X cable. . In this case, a
/B line terminator must be installed.
This device is used to show that the bus X has not been adapted.
z FIPIO Bus cable and PCMCIA communication card, if necessary.
6
Switch the PC on and start installing the various software packages:
z ISAWAY driver which corresponds to the OS installed: WINDOWS 95/98 or
Windows NT, (see the service instructions provided with the processor),
z OFS data server if used,
z PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro software if used.
309
PCX 57 processors: installation
Integrating a PCX 57 processor into an bus X section
General
As standard, the PCX 57 processor is equipped to be built into the start of the X Bus
line, and for this reason it has a built-in A/ line terminator.
If you want to integrate the processor into an bus X section, the module is supplied
with two accessories which make this possible:
a shield equipped with:
z a 9-pin SUB D connector for linking up a TSX CBY• bus X cable,
z a cable for connecting the 9-pin SUB D connector to the processor card,
z a daughterboard equipped with two connectors which interface between the
PCX 57 card and the 9-pin SUB D connector of the aforementioned shield. This
daughterboard is fitted instead of the A/ line terminator, mounted on the PCX 57
card as standard.
z
Illustration
Shield and daughterboard:
Shield
Daughterboard
310
35011052.06 07/2008
PCX 57 processors: installation
Installation
procedure
35011052.06 07/2008
Carry out the following steps
Step
Action
1
Remove the A/ line
terminator from its slot on
the processor.
2
Fit the daughterboard in
place of the A/ line
terminator.
3
Once the processor card is
in place in the PC, fix the
shield in the available slot
situated immediately to the
left of the processor card, as
indicated in the diagram
below.
4
Connect the cable to the
connector of the
daughterboard which was
installed in step 2
Illustration
311
PCX 57 processors: installation
Example of the
topology of a
PCX 57 station
with the
processor
integrated in an
bus X section
Diagram
Host PC
PCX 57
PCX 57
Note: In this example, as the PCX 57 processor is no longer integrated at the start
of the line, the TSX TLY EX A/ and /B line terminators must be installed on each
of the racks situated at the end of the lines.
312
35011052.06 07/2008
PCX 57 processors: installation
How to install/remove the memory extension card on the PCX 57 processor
Principle
Perform the following steps to install the memory card on the PCX 57 processor:
Step
Action
1
Place the PCMCIA card in its allocated slot.
2
Slide it in until it can go no further.
3
Position the card in the PC with the power turned off.
CAUTION
INSTALLING MEMORY EXTENSION CARD WITH POWER ON
The memory extension card must be installed on the processor card with the
power switched off and before the processor card is installed in the PC.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
Illustration
Explanatory diagram:
Note: If the program in the PCMCIA memory cartridge contains the RUN AUTO
option, the processor will automatically restart in RUN mode after the cartridge is
inserted and the PC is turned on.
35011052.06 07/2008
313
PCX 57 processors: installation
Processing on insertion/extraction of a PCMCIA memory card on a PCX 57 PLC
General
WARNING
UNEXPECTED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Do no insert or extract the PCMCIA memory card into or from a PCX 57 when it is
powered-up.
These actions, although they will not damage the processor or any other device,
will cause random processor behavior.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.
WARNING
UNEXPECTED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
If the program contained in the PCMCIA memory card includes the RUN AUTO
option, the processor will automatically restart in RUN mode after the card is
inserted and the PC is switched on.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.
314
35011052.06 07/2008
PCX 57 processors: installation
Memory cards for PCX 57 processors
General
35011052.06 07/2008
See Standard and Backup Memory Cards for PLCs, p. 168 and Application + Files
Type Memory Cards, p. 171:
315
PCX 57 processors: installation
Precautions to be taken when replacing a PCX 57 processor
Important
WARNING
UNEXPECTED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
If the PCX P57 processor is being replaced by another processor which is not
blank (the processor has already been programmed and contains an application),
the power for all the PLC station’s control units must be switched off.
Before restoring power to the control units, check that the processor contains the
required application.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.
316
35011052.06 07/2008
PCX 57 processors: Diagnostics
35
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
This Chapter deals with PCX 57 processor diagnostics.
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
35011052.06 07/2008
Topic
Page
Description of PCX 57 processor LEDs
318
Changing the PCX 57 RAM memory backup battery
320
Changing the PCX 57 RAM memory PCMCIA card battery
323
What happens after you press the processor RESET button
325
How the PCX 57 behaves after an action on the PC
326
Finding errors via the processor status LEDs
327
317
PCX 57 processors: Diagnostics
Description of PCX 57 processor LEDs
Labeling of the
LEDs
Six LEDs (RUN, TER, BAT, I/O, FIP and ERR) found on the processor card enable
fast diagnostics of the status of the PLC station.
Due to the small amount of space available on the shield, only the ERR LED is
visible when the PC housing the processor is closed.
To make it more user-friendly, the state of the RUN, I/O, ERR and FIP LEDs is
displayed via a utility in the task bar in Windows 95/98 or Windows NT on the PC
with the processor card. This functionality is only available when the host PC is
running (ISAWAY driver installed)
318
35011052.06 07/2008
PCX 57 processors: Diagnostics
Description
The following table describes the role of each LED:
Display
LED
Lit
BAT
(red)
z
battery missing,
Flashing
Off
-
running normally.
z battery flat,
z battery the wrong way
round,
z wrong type of battery.
RUN
(green)
PLC running normally,
program executing.
PLC in STOP mode or
blocked by software
error.
z PLC not configured:
TER
(yellow)
-
terminal port link active.
The rate of flashing is
relative to the amount of
traffic.
link not active.
I/O
(red)
input/output errors
Bus X error (1).
coming from a module, a
channel or a
configuration error.
normal state, no internal
error.
FIP
(yellow)
-
FIPIO bus link active.
The rate of flashing is
relative to the amount of
traffic.
link not active.
ERR
(red)
processor or system
error.
z PLC not configured
normal state, no internal
error.
(application missing,
invalid or
incompatible),
z PLC blocked by a
software error,
z memory card battery
error,
z Bus X error (1).
application missing,
invalid or
incompatible,
z PLC error: processor
or system error.
Note:
z (1) a bus X error is indicated by simultaneous flashing of the ERR and I/O LEDs.
z the FIP LED is only present on TPCX P57 353 processor.
35011052.06 07/2008
319
PCX 57 processors: Diagnostics
Changing the PCX 57 RAM memory backup battery
Introduction
This battery on the PCX 57 processor module ensures that the processor internal
RAM memory and the real-time clock are saved in the event of a power outage. It is
delivered in the same packaging as the processor and must be installed by the user.
Note: With a PCX 57 processor, there is no point in putting a battery into the rack
power supply which usually houses the processor (rack with address 0).
Installing the
battery for the
first time
Changing the
battery
To install the battery, carry out the following:
Step
Action
1
Remove the cover by squeezing the sides.
2
Put the battery in its slot taking care to observe polarities.
3
Replace the cover which keeps the battery in its slot.
The battery can be changed every year as a preventative measure or when the BAT
LED is lit. However the LED is not visible when the PC is closed, but you have a
%S68 system bit (0 = backup battery OK) which can be used by the application
program to generate an alarm to warn that the battery needs changing.
To change the battery, carry out the following:
Step
320
Action
1
Switch the PC off.
2
Disconnect the different cables linked to the processor.
3
Open the PC.
4
Take the card out of its slot.
5
Remove the cover.
6
Remove the old battery from its slot.
7
Put in the new battery, observing the polarities.
8
Replace the cover.
9
Put the card back in its slot, close the PC, connect external components and
switch on.
35011052.06 07/2008
PCX 57 processors: Diagnostics
CAUTION
PROLONGED BATTERY CHANGE TIME
Changing the battery should not exceed the limit stated in this document for the PC
being switched off. Exceeding this limit may cause data in RAM memory to be lost.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
Illustration
The following diagram shows how the battery is installed:
1: cover
2: battery
35011052.06 07/2008
321
PCX 57 processors: Diagnostics
How often must
the battery be
changed?
Period of battery backup
The length of time during which the battery ensures backup of the processor’s
internal RAM memory and the real-time clock depends on two factors:
the percentage of time for which the PLC is switched off and as a result the
battery is being used,
z the ambient temperature when the PLC is switched off.
z
Summary table:
≤ 30°C
40°C
50°C
60°C
PLC off for 12 hours 5 years
per day
3
years
2 years
1 year
PLC off for 1 hour
per day
5
years
4.5 years 4
years
Ambient temperature when inoperative
Backup time
5 years
Independent saving by the processor
The processors have their own offline independent save function to save the
processor internal RAM memory and the real-time clock, which allows the removal
of:
z
the PCX 57 processor battery.
The backup time depends on the ambient temperature.
Assuming that the processor was switched on previously, the guaranteed time
varies in the following way:
322
Ambient temperature when switching off
20°C
30°C
40°C
50°C
Backup time
2h
45mn
20mn
8mn
35011052.06 07/2008
PCX 57 processors: Diagnostics
Changing the PCX 57 RAM memory PCMCIA card battery
Introduction
RAM memory PCMCIA cards (TSX MRP etc.) must have a battery (reference TSX
BAT M01) which needs to be changed.
How to change
the battery
Carry out the following steps:
Illustration
Step
Action
1
Take the card out of its slot.
2
Hold the PCMCIA card so you can access the battery slot. This is at the end of
the card without the connector.
3
Unlock the battery holder, which is at the end of the card without the connector.
To do this press the lock towards the bottom of the card (the opposite direction
to the write protection micro-switch) while pulling towards the back.
4
Remove the battery and holder unit from its slot.
5
Swap the old battery for an identical 3V battery. Polarities must be observed by
placing the + labels on the holder and the battery on the same side.
6
Place the battery and holder unit back in its slot, then lock it. To do this, carry
out the removal procedure in reverse.
7
Put the memory card back in its allocated slot on the PCX 57 card.
Principle diagram:
Write protection
Lock
Battery slot
Number
35011052.06 07/2008
323
PCX 57 processors: Diagnostics
Battery life
See the following table:
PCMCIA card stored in normal conditions (-20°C to 70°C)
12 months
PCMCIA card fitted in an operating PLC (0°C à 60°C).
36 months
Note: During operation, the processor’s ERR LED flashes if the PCMCIA card
battery is old.
324
35011052.06 07/2008
PCX 57 processors: Diagnostics
What happens after you press the processor RESET button
General
All processors have a RESET button on their front panel, which when pressed,
causes a PLC cold start, in RUN or in STOP mode (1), in the application contained
on the memory card (or in internal RAM).
RESET following
a processor fault
As soon as a processor fault appears, the alarm relay on rack 0 (2) is deactivated
(open contact) and the module outputs switch to fallback position or are maintained
in the current state depending on the selection made at configuration. Pressing the
RESET button causes the PLC, forced into STOP mode, to cold start.
(1) Start in RUN or in STOP mode is defined at configuration.
(2) With the PCX 57 processor, this relay is not controlled.
Note: When the RESET button is pressed, and during the PLC cold start, the
terminal link is deactivated.
35011052.06 07/2008
325
PCX 57 processors: Diagnostics
How the PCX 57 behaves after an action on the PC
General
The following table describes the different actions on the PC and what implications
they have for the PCX 57:
Action on the PC
PCX 57 behavior
Switching off/on
warm restart if the application environment has not changed
Micro-outages on the
network supplying the
PC
As the PCX 57 does not have a filtering mechanism for microoutages, every micro-outage not filtered by the PC’s internal
power supply causes a warm restart of the PCX 57, if the
application environment has not changed
Pressing the RESET
button
generally, and subject to the PC’s RESET button activating the
RSTDRV signal on the ISA bus, pressing the PC RESET button
causes a warm restart of the PCX 57, if the application
environment has not changed.
PC’s software RESET
(CTRL ALT DEL)
these actions have no effect on the current state of the PCX 57
processor (if the PCX 57 processor is in RUN, it stays in , etc.) and
does not cause a warm restart or cold restart
Note: A PC software blockage has no effect on the current state of the PCX 57
processor (identical behavior to a PC software RESET).
326
35011052.06 07/2008
PCX 57 processors: Diagnostics
Finding errors via the processor status LEDs
General
See:
Finding errors using processor state LEDs, p. 205,
Non blocking errors, p. 206,
z Blocking errors, p. 208,
z Processor or system errors, p. 209.
z
z
35011052.06 07/2008
327
PCX 57 processors: Diagnostics
328
35011052.06 07/2008
PCX 57 203 processor
36
General characteristics of the PCX 57 203 processor
PCX 57 203
processor
The following table gives the general characteristics of the PCX 57 203 processor.
Reference
PCX 57 203
Maximum
configuration
Maximum number of TSX RKY 12EX racks
Functions
Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks 16
Maximum
number of slots
with TSXRKY 12EX
87
with TSXRKY 4EX, 6EX, 8EX
111
Maximum
number of
channels
In-rack discrete I/O
1024
In-rack analog I/O
80
Maximum
number of
connections
Built-in UNI-TELWAY (terminal
port)
1
Network (ETHWAY, FIPWAY,
Modbus+)
1
Master FIPIO (built-in)
-
Third party field bus
1
AS-i field bus
4
Application (counting, axis, etc.) 24
Savable real-time clock
35011052.06 07/2008
8
yes
329
PCX 57 203 processor
Reference
PCX 57 203
Memory
capacity
Savable internal RAM
Application
structure
PCMCIA
memory card
(maximum
capacity)
Application area
Symbol Zone
-
File area
128K16 or 640K16
1
Fast task
1
Event processing (of which 1 has priority)
100% Boolean
64
0.21 ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.28 ms
100% Boolean
0.27 ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
330
160K16
Master task
Application
Internal RAM
code execution
time for a 1K
PCMCIA card
instruction
System
overhead
48K16
0.40 ms
MAST task
1 ms
FAST task
0.35 ms
35011052.06 07/2008
PCX 57 353 processor
37
General characteristics of the PCX 57 353 processor
PCX 57 353
processor
The following table introduces the general characteristics of the PCX 57 353
processor.
Reference
PCX 57 353
Maximum
configuration
Maximum number of TSX RKY 12EX racks
Functions
35011052.06 07/2008
8
Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks 16
Maximum
number of slots
with TSXRKY 12EX
87
with TSXRKY 4EX, 6EX, 8EX
111
Maximum
number of
channels
In-rack discrete I/O
1024
In-rack analog I/O
128
Maximum
number of
connections
Built-in UNI-TELWAY (terminal
port)
1
Network (ETHWAY, FIPWAY,
Modbus+)
3
FIPIO master (built-in), number
of devices
127
Third party field bus
2
AS-i field bus
8
Application (counting, axis, etc.) 32
331
PCX 57 353 processor
Reference
PCX 57 353
Savable real-time clock
yes
Memory
capacity
Savable internal RAM
80K16 or 96K16 (1)
PCMCIA memory Application area
card (maximum
Symbol Zone
capacity)
File area
384K16
Master task
1
Application
structure
128K16 or 640K16
Fast task
1
Event processing (of which 1 has priority)
64
Application
Internal RAM
code execution
time for a 1K
PCMCIA card
instruction
System
overhead
-
100% Boolean
0.15 ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.21 ms
100% Boolean
0.22 ms
65% Boolean + 35% digital
0.32 ms
MAST task
1 ms
FAST task
0.25 ms
(1) 1st figure when the application is in internal RAM, 2nd figure when the application
is in card memory.
332
35011052.06 07/2008
Atrium PCX 57 CPU: general
characteristics
38
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
The aim of this Chapter is to introduce you to the characteristics of devices that can
be used when installing a PCX 57 station.
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
35011052.06 07/2008
Topic
Page
Electrical characteristics of PCX 57 processors
334
Characteristics of Atrium PL7 processors
335
Devices which can be connected to or built into the processor
336
Defining and Counting Application-specific channels
337
Processor performance
338
333
Atrium PCX 57 CPU: general characteristics
Electrical characteristics of PCX 57 processors
General
As the processors can be fitted with certain devices which do not have their own
power supply, the consumption of these devices must be taken into account when
establishing a global breakdown of power consumption.
Devices without their own power supply which can be connected to the terminal
port:
z adjustment terminal: T FTX 117 ADJUST,
z unit TSX P ACC01 for connecting to the UNI-TELWAY bus.
z Devices without their own power supply which can be built into the processor:
z PCMCIA communication cards TSX FPP 10/20,
z PCMCIA communication card TSX SCP 111/112/114,
z PCMCIA communication card TSX MBP 100,
z PCMCIA modem card TSX MDM 10.
z
Feature of PCX
57 processors
PCX 57 processors have their own 5VDC power supply, which is generated from the
host PC’s 12 VDC power supply. As a result of this, the 12 VDC power supply from
the host PC must have sufficient power to accommodate a PCX 57 processor.
Power
consumption
This table shows consumption of the host PC at 12VDC:
Dissipated
power
334
Processor + PCMCIA
memory card
Typical consumption
Maximum consumption
TPCX P57 203
400 mA
560 mA
TPCX P57 353
550 mA
770 mA
This table states the dissipated power for PCX 57 processors:
Processor + PCMCIA
memory card
Typical consumption
Maximum consumption
TPCX P57 203
4,8W
6,72W
TSX P57 353
6,6W
9,24W
35011052.06 07/2008
Atrium PCX 57 CPU: general characteristics
Characteristics of Atrium PL7 processors
Specifications
Behavior of the Atrium processor
z
z
selection of processor
a dedicated command control processor.
The following table gives the general characteristics of the TSXP570244
processors.
TSXP57454
processor
Original processor
General usage
Dedicated command Frequency of the
processor frequency control processor
dedicated command
(MHz)
control processor (MHz).
T PCX 57 203
INTEL or AMD 486
48
SONIX
48
T PCX 57 353
INTEL or AMD 486
72
SONIX
48
35011052.06 07/2008
335
Atrium PCX 57 CPU: general characteristics
Devices which can be connected to or built into the processor
Tables of
consumption
and dissipated
power
Consumption:
Consumption at 12VDC from host PC
Typical
Maximum
Devices without their own power
supply which can be connected to the
terminal port (TER)
TFTX 117 ADJUST
144 mA
157 mA
TSXPACC01
69 mA
116 mA
PCMCIA communication card which
can be built into the processor
TSXFPP10
153 mA
167 mA
TSXFPP20
153 mA
167 mA
TSXSCP111
65 mA
139 mA
TSXSCP112
56 mA
139 mA
TSXSCP114
69 mA
139 mA
TSXMBP100
102 mA
144 mA
TSXMDM10
90 mA
-
Dissipated power:
Dissipated power
336
Typical
Maximum
Devices without their own power
supply which can be connected to
the terminal port (TER)
TFTX 117 ADJUST
1.7 W
1.9 W
TSXPACC01
0.8 W
1.4 W
PCMCIA communication card which
can be built into the processor
TSXFPP10
1.8 W
2.0 W
TSXFPP20
1.8 W
2,0W
TSXSCP111
0.8 W
1.7 W
TSXSCP112
0.7 W
1.7 W
TSXSCP114
0.8 W
1.7 W
TSXMBP100
1.2 W
1.7 W
TSXMDM10
1.1 W
-
35011052.06 07/2008
Atrium PCX 57 CPU: general characteristics
Defining and Counting Application-specific channels
Summary table
Applications:
Application
Counting
Movement commands
Step by step control
Weighing
Communication Serial link
Modem
FIPIO agent
Master
FIPIO
Module/card
Applicationspecific channels
Number
TSXCTY2A
Yes
2
TSXCTY2C
Yes
2
TSXCTY4A
Yes
4
CCY 1128
Yes
1
TSXCAY21
Yes
2
TSXCAY41
Yes
4
TSXCAY22
Yes
2
TSXCAY42
Yes
4
TSXCAY33
Yes
3
CSY 84
Yes
32
TSXCFY11
Yes
1
TSXCFY21
Yes
2
TSXISPY100 / TSXISP101
Yes
2
TSXSCP11. in the
processor
No
0(*)
TSXSCP11. in the
TSXSCY21.
Yes
1
TSXSCP11. in the
TSXSCY21.
Yes
1
TSXSCY 21 (built-in
channel)
Yes
1
TSXMDM10
Yes
1
TSXFPP10 in the processor
No
0(*)
Built into the processor
No
0(*)
(*) Although these channels are application-specific, they should not be taken into
account when calculating the maximum number of application-specific channels
which can be supported by the processor.
Note: Only channels configured from PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro software can be
counted.
35011052.06 07/2008
337
Atrium PCX 57 CPU: general characteristics
Processor performance
General
338
See Processor performance, p. 271:
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY supply modules
V
At a Glance
Subject of this
Part
This part describes TSX PSY ... supply modules and their implementation.
What's in this
Part?
This part contains the following chapters:
35011052.06 07/2008
Chapter
Chapter Name
Page
39
TSX PSY… supply modules: introduction
341
40
TSX PSY … supply modules: installation
347
41
TSX PSY … supply modules: diagnostics
367
42
TSX PSY … supply modules : auxiliary functions
375
43
TSX PSY power supply modules: breakdown of power
consumption and power
381
44
TSX PSY 2600 power supply module
391
45
TSX PSY 5500 power supply module
393
46
TSX PSY 8500 power supply module
395
47
TSX PSY 1610 power supply module
397
48
TSX PSY 3610 power supply module
399
49
TSX PSY 5520 power supply module
401
339
TSX PSY... supply modules
340
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY… supply modules:
introduction
39
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
The aim of this Chapter is to introduce the TSX PSY… supply modules .
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
35011052.06 07/2008
Topic
Page
General introduction
342
Supply modules: description
344
341
TSX PSY…supply modules : introduction
General introduction
At a Glance
TSX PSY… supply modules are designed to supply each TSX RKY… rack and its
modules. The supply module is chosen according to the distribution network (direct
or alternating current) and the power required (standard or double format model).
There are several types of supply modules:
z
z
Auxiliary
functions of
supply modules
Supply modules
for an alternating
current network
supply modules for an alternating current network,
supply modules for a direct current network.
Each supply module has auxiliary functions:
a display panel,
an alarm relay,
z a slot for a battery for saving the data in the processor’s RAM memory,
z a recessed button which, when pressed, simulates a power-supply outage, and
launches a warm restart of the application,
z a 24 VDC sensor supply (only on models supplied from an alternating current
network).
z
z
The following table displays the types of supply module according to their format:
Standard format model
Double format model
TSX PSY 2600
100...240 VCA
TSX PSY 5500
100...120 VCA
342
TSX PSY 8500
200...240 VCA
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY…supply modules : introduction
Supply modules
for a direct
current network
The following table displays the types of supply module according to their format:
Standard format model
Double format model
TSX PSY 1610
24 VCC
non-insulated
TSX PSY 3610
24 VCC non-insulated
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY 5520
24...48 VCC insulated
343
TSX PSY…supply modules : introduction
Supply modules: description
At a Glance
The supply models take the form of:
z
z
Illustration
standard format modules, for TSX PSY 2600 and TSX PSY 1610 modules,
double format modules for TSX PSY 5500/3610/5520/8500 modules.
These illustrations label the different components of a standard supply module and
a double format supply module:
Standard format
344
Double format
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY…supply modules : introduction
Description
This table describes the components of a supply module:
Number
Function
1
Display block containing:
z an OK LED (green), lit if the voltages are present and correct,
z a BAT LED (red), lit when the battery is worn out or missing,
z a 24V LED (green), lit when the voltage sensor is present. This LED is only
present on alternating current supply modules TSX PSY 2600/5500/8500.
2
Recessed RESET button which, when pushed, triggers a warm restart of the
application.
3
Slot for a battery which allows the processor’s internal RAM memory to be
saved.
4
Flap for protecting the front panel of the module.
5
Screw terminal block for linking up to:
z the supply network,
z the alarm relay contact,
z the sensor supply for alternating current supply modules TSX PSY 2600/
5500/8500.
6
7
Hole for a cable-tightening clip to go through.
Fuse located under the module protecting:
z the 24VR voltage on the direct current supply module TSX PSY 3610,
z the primary voltage on the direct current supply module TSX PSY 1610,
Note: on the TSX PSY 2600/5500/5520/8500 supply modules, the primary
voltage protection fuse is inside the module and cannot be accessed.
8
35011052.06 07/2008
110/220 voltage selector, only present on alternating current supply modules
TSX PSY 5500/8500. On delivery, the selector is set to 220.
345
TSX PSY…supply modules : introduction
346
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY … supply modules:
installation
40
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
This Chapter deals with the installation of TSX PSY … power supply modules.
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
35011052.06 07/2008
Topic
Page
Installation/mounting TSX PSY … supply modules .
348
Rules for connecting TSX PSY supply modules
349
Connecting alternating current power supply modules
352
Connecting direct current power supply modules from a floating 24 or 48 VDC
direct current network
354
Connecting direct current power supply modules from an alternating current
network
356
Sensor and pre-actuator power supply servo control
362
Definition of protection devices at the start of a line
365
347
TSX PSY … supply modules: installation
Installation/mounting TSX PSY … supply modules .
Mounting
The mounting of the TSX PSY… power supply module is identical to the mounting
of processor modules and, in general terms, the same as the mounting of other
modules (see How to mount processor modules, p. 161).
Installation
This table describes the principles of installing power supply modules:
Type of supply
module
Description
Standard format:
TSX PSY 2600/1610
installed in the first slot in
each TSX RKY rack and
occupy the PS position.
Double format:
TSX PSY 3610/5500/
5520/8500
installed in the first two slots
in each TSX RKY rack and
occupy the PS and 00
positions.
Illustration
Note: Each supply module is provided with a locating device that only allows the
module to be installed in the slot designated above.
Note: the TSX PSY 8500 supply module does not provide 24VR voltage. Because
of this, a rack fitted with this supply module will not be able to accommodate some
modules, such as relay output and weighing modules
348
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY … supply modules: installation
Rules for connecting TSX PSY supply modules
General points
The TSX PSY ••• power supply modules on each rack are equipped with a nonremovable terminal block, provided with a cover, which is used to connect the power
supply, the alarm relay, the protection ground and, for alternating current supplies,
the supply of the 24 VDC sensors.
This screw terminal block is equipped with captive clamp screws which can connect
a maximum of 2 wires with a cross-sectional area of 1.5 mm 2 (14 AWG) with wire
end ferrules, or one wire with a cross-sectional area of 2.5 mm 2 (12 AWG)
(maximum tightening torque on screw terminal: 0.8 N.m (0.6 lb-ft)).
The wires come out vertically towards the bottom. These wires can be kept in place
with a cable-clip.
35011052.06 07/2008
349
TSX PSY … supply modules: installation
Illustration
This diagram shows the screw terminal block:
Supply
24V
sensors
Alarm relay
Alarm relay
Network ~
110-220V
24V
network (1)
Protection
ground
PE
Protection
ground
PE
Direct current supply
TSX PSY 1610/3610/5520
Alternating current supply
TSX PSY 2600/5500/8500
(1) 24...48VAC for the TSX PSY 5520 supply module.
CAUTION
IMPROPER VOLTAGE SELECTION
For the power supply modules TSX PSY 5500/8500, position the voltage selector
according to the voltage power used (110 or 220 VAC).
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
Provide a protection device and switchgear upstream of the PLC station.
When selecting protection devices, the user should take into account the signaling
currents which are defined in the characteristics tables for each supply module.
350
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY … supply modules: installation
Note: As direct current supply modules TSX PSY 1610/2610/5520 have a strong
signaling current, it is not advisable to use them on direct current networks which
protect flood-back current limits.
When a power supply module is connected to a direct current network, it is
mandatory to limit the length of the supply cable in order to help preventing
transmission loss.
z TSX PSY 1610 supply module:
z length limited to 30 meters (60 meters there and back) with copper wires and
a 2.5 mm2 (12 AWG) cross-section,
z length limited to 20 meters (40 meters there and back) with copper wires and
a 1.5 mm2 (14 AWG) cross-section.
z TSX PSY 3610 and TSX PSY 5520 supply modules:
z length limited to 15 meters (30 meters there and back) with copper wires and
a 2.5 mm2 (12 AWG) cross-section,
z length limited to 10 meters (20 meters there and back) with copper wires and
a 1.5 mm2 (14 AWG) cross-section.
WARNING
DIRECT CURRENT POWER SUPPLY GROUNDING CONSIDERATIONS
The 0 V and physical ground are linked internally in the PLCs, in the network
cabling accessories, and in some control consoles.
For applications which use a "floating" installation, measures need to be taken with
connections. These depend on the method used for installation. In these cases, it
is mandatory to use insulated direct current power supplies.
Please contact us when you are defining the electrical installation.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.
35011052.06 07/2008
351
TSX PSY … supply modules: installation
Connecting alternating current power supply modules
Connecting a
single-rack PLC
station
Illustration:
Alternating network 100-240 V
Supply control
Pre-actuators
Sensor supply
for sensors on the rack (2)
TSX PSY ..00
Q: general section switch,
KM: circuit contactor-breaker,
(1) insulating connector bar for finding grounding faults
(2) available current:
0.6 A with a TSX PSY 2600 (see TSX PSY 2600 power supply module, p. 391)
power supply module,
z 0.8 A with a TSX PSY 5500 (see TSX PSY 5500 power supply module, p. 393)
power supply module,
z 1.6 A with a TSX PSY 8500 (see TSX PSY 8500 power supply module, p. 395)
power supply module,
z
Note: Protective fuses: alternating current power supply modules TSX PSY
2600/5500/8500 are fitted during manufacture with a protective fuse. This fuse, in
series with the L input, is located inside the module and cannot be accessed.
352
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY … supply modules: installation
Connecting a
PLC station
made up of
several racks
Illustration:
Alternating network 100-240 V
Supply control
pre-actuators
Sensor supply
for sensors on the rack (2)
TSX PSY ..00
Supply control
pre-actuators
Sensor supply
for sensors on the rack (2)
TSX PSY ..00
Note: If there are several PLC stations supplied by the same network, the
principles of connection are identical.
Q: general section switch,
KM: circuit contactor-breaker,
(1) insulating connector bar for finding grounding faults
(2) available current:
z 0.6 A with a TSX PSY 2600 (see TSX PSY 2600 power supply module, p. 391) power supply module,
z 0.8 A with a TSX PSY 5500 (see TSX PSY 5500 power supply module, p. 393) power supply module,
z 1.6 A with a TSX PSY 8500 (see TSX PSY 8500 power supply module, p. 395) power supply module,
Note: Protective fuses: alternating current power supply modules TSX PSY
2600/5500/8500 are fitted during manufacture with a protective fuse. This fuse, in
series with the L input, is located inside the module and cannot be accessed.
35011052.06 07/2008
353
TSX PSY … supply modules: installation
Connecting direct current power supply modules from a floating 24 or 48 VDC
direct current network
Illustration
Diagram showing the principle:
Pre-actuator
supply control
Rack 0
TSX PSY 5520
Alternating network
low voltage
Battery
charger
Pre-actuator
supply control
Rack x
Battery
TSX PSY 5520
Insulation
tester
24 VDC floating network for supplying the
sensors, actuators and discrete input/output
modules
354
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY … supply modules: installation
WARNING
GROUNDING CONSIDERATIONS FOR FLOATING MOUNTING OR MARINE
APPLICATIONS
In the case of floating mounting (not linked to ground) used for specific applications
and in particular in Marine Applications, an insulated TSX PSY 5520 (24/48 VDC)
supply module must be selected.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.
Note: A device can continually measure the level of insulation of the 24 VDC (or
48 VDC) in relation to the ground, and can give an alert when the level of insulation
is abnormally low.
The input/output modules in the Premium range are insulated.
35011052.06 07/2008
355
TSX PSY … supply modules: installation
Connecting direct current power supply modules from an alternating current
network
Non-insulated
power supply
modules TSX
PSY 1610/3610
Connecting a single-rack PLC station with a ground-referenced network:
Alternating network 100-240 V
Supply control
pre-actuators
TSX PSY ..10
Supply for sensors/
pre-actuators
Q: General section switch,
KM: Circuit contactor-breaker,
(1): External shunt provided with the power supply module,
(2): Insulating connector bar for finding grounding faults. In this case, it is necessary
to switch off the supply in order to disconnect the network from the ground,
(3): Optional use of a process power supply module (see Process and AS-i supply,
p. 403),
(4): Protective fuse, (4 A, with time-delay) only necessary with the TSX PSY 3610
power supply module.
The TSX PSY 1610 power supply module is fitted during manufacture with a
protective fuse located under the module and in series on the 24V input (3.5 A, 5x20
time-delay fuse).
356
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY … supply modules: installation
Connecting a multi-rack PLC station with a ground-referenced network:
Alternating network 100-240 V
Supply control
pre-actuators
TSX PSY ..10
Supply
sensors/
pre-actuators
Supply control
pre-actuators
TSX PSY ..10
Q: General section switch,
KM: Circuit contactor-breaker,
(1): External shunt provided with the power supply module,
(2): Insulating connector bar for finding grounding faults. In this case, it is necessary
to switch off the supply in order to disconnect the network from the ground,
(3): Optional use of a process power supply module,
(4): Protective fuse, (4 A, with time-delay) only necessary with the TSX PSY 3610
power supply module.
35011052.06 07/2008
357
TSX PSY … supply modules: installation
The TSX PSY 1610 power supply module is fitted during manufacture with a
protective fuse located under the module and in series on the 24V input (3.5 A, 5x20
time-delay fuse).
Note: If there are several PLC stations supplied by the same network, the
principles of connection are identical.
358
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY … supply modules: installation
TSX PSY 5520
isolated power
supply module
Connecting a single-rack PLC station with a ground-referenced network:
Alternating network 100-240 V
Supply control
pre-actuators
TSX PSY 5520
Supply for sensors/
pre-actuators
Q: General section switch,
KM: Circuit contactor-breaker,
(1): Insulating connector bar for finding grounding faults,
(2): Optional use of a process power supply.
Note: Protective fuse: the TSX PSY 5520 power supply modules are fitted during
manufacture with a protective fuse. This fuse, in series with the 24/48V input, is
located inside the module and cannot be accessed.
35011052.06 07/2008
359
TSX PSY … supply modules: installation
Connecting a multi-rack PLC station with a ground-referenced network:
Alternating network 100-240 V
Supply control
pre-actuators
TSX PSY 5520
Supply for sensors/
pre-actuators
Supply control
pre-actuators
TSX PSY 5520
Q: General section switch,
KM: Circuit contactor-breaker,
(1): Insulating connector bar for finding grounding faults,
(2): Optional use of a process power supply.
360
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY … supply modules: installation
Note: Protective fuse: the TSX PSY 5520 power supply modules are fitted during
manufacture with a protective fuse. This fuse, in series with the 24/48V input, is
located inside the module and cannot be accessed.
Note: If there are several PLC stations supplied by the same network, the
principles of connection are identical.
35011052.06 07/2008
361
TSX PSY … supply modules: installation
Sensor and pre-actuator power supply servo control
How to set up
servo control
It is recommended that servo control of the different power supplies is set up in the
following sequence:
Step
Safety standards
Action
1
Switch on the power supply to the PLC and the inputs (sensors), using the
contactor KM (see diagram ("Connecting DC power supply modules from an AC
network", Premium and Atrium using Unity Pro, Processors, racks and power
supply modules, Implementation Manual)).
2
If the PLC is in RUN mode and running on AUTO, switch on the output power
supply (pre-actuators), using the contactor KA. This is controlled by the alarm
relay contact in each power supply.
Before restarting the installation following a stop (caused by a power outage or an
emergency stop), safety standards require authorization to be given by the operator.
The MANU/AUTO switch makes it possible to force outputs from a terminal, when
the PLC is in STOP mode.
362
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY … supply modules: installation
Example 1
PLC station supplied by alternating current:
Emergency
stop
Supply
pre-actuators
Run
Auto
Man.
alarm relay
contact
KA: contact controlled by alarm relay
from supply module in AUTO run mode.
35011052.06 07/2008
alarm relay
contact (1)
(1) When the PLC station is
composed of several racks: set
all the "alarm relay" contacts in series
(RAL0, RAL1, RAL2, etc.).
363
TSX PSY … supply modules: installation
Example 2
PLC station supplied by direct current:
Supply
sensors
Emergency
stop
Supply
pre-actuators
Run
Auto
Man.
alarm relay
contact
KA: contact controlled by alarm relay
from supply module in AUTO run mode.
364
alarm relay
contact (1)
(1) When the PLC station is
composed of several racks: set
all the "alarm relay" contacts in series
(RAL0, RAL1, RAL2, etc.).
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY … supply modules: installation
Definition of protection devices at the start of a line
Introduction
You are advised to mount a protection device, such as circuit breaker or fuse, at the
start of the line on the supply network.
The following information can be used to define the minimum amperage rating of the
circuit breaker or fuse for a given power supply module.
Selecting a line
circuit breaker
To select the amperage of the circuit breaker, the following three characteristics,
which are given for each supply module, should be taken into account.
the nominal input current: I rms,
signaling current: I,
z the It.
z
z
The minimum amperage for the circuit breaker should be selected as follows:
amperage of circuit breaker IN > the supply I rms,
max. circuit breaker I > the supply signal I,
z circuit breaker It at point A on the curve > the supplyIt.
z
z
Illustration: characteristics provided by the circuit breaker manufacturer.
Thermal zone
Magnetic zone
35011052.06 07/2008
365
TSX PSY … supply modules: installation
Selecting the line
fuse
When selecting the amperage rating of the line fuse, the two following characteristics, which are given for each power supply, should be taken into account:
z
z
the nominal input current: I rms,
I2t.
The minimum amperage rating for the fuse is selected as follows:
fuse caliber IN > 3 x the supply I rms,
2
2
z I t of the fuse > 3 x I t of the power supply.
z
Reminder of the characteristics of I rms, signal I, It and I2t for each power supply
module
TSX module
I rms
I
signal(1)
It
I2 t
PSY 2600 PSY 5500
PSY
8500
PSY
1610
PSY
3610
PSY
5520
at 24VDC
-
-
-
1.5A
2.7A
3A
at 48VDC
-
-
-
-
-
1.5A
at 100VAC
0.5A
1.7A
1.4A
-
-
-
at 24VAC
0.3A
0.5A
0.5A
-
-
-
at 24VDC
-
-
-
100A
150A
15A
at 48VDC
-
-
-
-
-
15A
at 100VAC
37A
38A
30A
-
-
-
at 24VAC
75A
38A
60A
-
-
-
at 24VDC
-
-
-
0.2As
0.5As
7As
at 48VDC
-
-
-
-
-
6As
at 100VAC
0.034As
0.11As
0.15As
-
-
-
at 24VAC
0.067As
0.11As
0.15As
-
-
-
at 24VDC
-
-
-
12.5A2s
20A2s
50A2s
at 48VDC
-
-
-
-
-
55A2s
at 100VAC
0.63A2s
4A2s
15A2s
-
-
-
at 24VAC
2.6A2s
2A2s
8A2s
-
-
-
(1) Values at initial power-up and at 25°C.
366
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY … supply modules:
diagnostics
41
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
This Chapter deals with the diagnostics of TSX PSY … supply modules .
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
35011052.06 07/2008
Topic
Page
Display on TSX PSY supply modules
368
Back-up battery on TSX PSY ... power supply modules
370
Loss of power to rack other than rack 0
372
What happens after pressing the RESET button on a power supply module
373
367
TSX PSY … supply modules: diagnostics
Display on TSX PSY supply modules
Introduction
Each supply module has a display panel containing:
three LEDs (OK, BAT, 24V) for the alternating current supply modules TSX PSY
2600/5500/8500,
z two LEDs (OK, BAT) for the direct current supply modules TSX PSY 1610/3610/
5520.
z
Description
The following table describes the various LEDs and their functions:
Display LED
Description
OK LED (green)
z on when operating normally,
z off when the output voltage is below the thresholds.
BAT LED (red)
z off when operating normally,
z on if battery is missing, flat, the wrong way round or the wrong
type.
24V LED (green)
z on when operating,
z off if the sensor 24V voltage delivered by the supply is no longer
present.
RESET push-button
Pressing this button activates a sequence of service signals identical
to:
z a power outage, when pressed,
z powering up, when released.
The application takes these actions (pressing and releasing) to mean
a warm restart ("FAST Task Cycle Time", Premium and Atrium using
Unity Pro, Processors, racks and power supply modules,
Implementation Manual).
368
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY … supply modules: diagnostics
Sensor supply
The alternating current supply modules TSX PSY 2600/5500/8500 have a built-in
power supply which delivers a voltage of 24VDC for supplying the sensors.
This sensor power supply can be accessed via the module’s screw connection
terminal block.
CAUTION
Parallelization
This supply module cannot be set in parallel with an external supply module.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
Note: The "24 VDC sensor supply module" output for the TSX PSY 8500 module
is a VLSV-(very low safety voltage) type This ensures the user’s safety.
35011052.06 07/2008
369
TSX PSY … supply modules: diagnostics
Back-up battery on TSX PSY ... power supply modules
At a Glance
Each power supply module has a slot for the installation of a battery which supplies
the internal RAM memory of the processors in order to save the data when the PLC
is switched off.
This battery is delivered in the same packaging as the power supply module. When
inserting it, you must respect the polarities.
Note: If a Atrium processor which can be integrated into a PC is being used, the
back-up battery is built into the processor and its characteristics are the same as
those described below.
370
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY … supply modules: diagnostics
Data on the backup battery
Battery characteristics: thyonile lithium chloride battery, 3.6V/0.8 Ah, 1/2AA size.
Spare part product reference: TSX PLP 01.
Period for which data is stored: the data storage time depends on two factors:
the percentage of time for which the PLC is switched off and as a result the
battery is being used,
z the ambient temperature when the PLC is switched off.
z
Table of the ambient temperatures when switched off:
Ambient temperature when inoperative
≤ 30°C
40°C
50°C
60°C
Backup time
PLC off for 12
hours per day
5 years
3
years
2
years
1 year
PLC off for 1
hour per day
5 years
5
years
4.5
years
4
years
Monitoring the battery status: when the power is on, it monitors the status of the
battery. If the battery is less than nominal, the user is informed visually by the BAT
(red) LED which lights up. If this happens, the battery must be changed immediately.
The %S68 system bit gives the status of the backup battery (0 = battery OK).
Changing the battery: the battery can be changed when the power supply module
is on, or immediately after switching it off. In the latter case, the time for intervention
is limited.
The backup time depends on the ambient temperature. Assuming that the processor
was switched on previously, the typical backup time varies in the following way.
35011052.06 07/2008
Ambient temperature when switching off
20°C
30°C
40°C
50°C
Backup time
2h
45mn
20mn
8mn
371
TSX PSY … supply modules: diagnostics
Loss of power to rack other than rack 0
General
All the channels on this rack are seen as in error by the processor, but the other
racks are not affected. The values of the inputs in error are no longer updated in the
application memory and are reset to zero in a discrete input module, unless they
have been forced, when they are maintained at the forcing value.
Limit of outage
period
If the outage period is less than 10 ms for alternating current power supplies or less
than 1 ms direct current power supplies, the outage is not detected by the program,
which will run as normal.
372
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY … supply modules: diagnostics
What happens after pressing the RESET button on a power supply module
General
The power supply module of each rack has a RESET button on its front panel, which
when pressed triggers an initialization sequence of the modules on the rack it is
supplying.
When this action takes place in a power supply module in the rack supporting the
TSX P57/TSX H57 processor (rack 0), it causes a warm restart.
Special case with
the PCI 57
processor
35011052.06 07/2008
In this case, the processor is not physically present on the rack at address 0, so
pressing the RESET button on the rack power supply module does not cause the
application to warm restart, nevertheless the modules present on the rack are
reinitialized.
373
TSX PSY … supply modules: diagnostics
374
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY … supply modules :
auxiliary functions
42
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
This Chapter deals with the auxiliary functions of TSX PSY … supply modules .
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
35011052.06 07/2008
Topic
Page
Alarm relay on TSX PSY supply modules
376
Characteristics of the alarm relay contact
379
375
TSX PSY … supply modules : auxiliary functions
Alarm relay on TSX PSY supply modules
Introduction
The alarm relay located in each supply module has a potential free contact, which
can be accessed on the module’s screw connection terminal block.
Illustration:
Connection
terminal block
376
Ral
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY … supply modules : auxiliary functions
Alarm relay of
the module
situated on the
rack supporting
the processor
(rack 0)
When operating normally, with the PLC in RUN mode, the alarm relay is activated
and its contact is closed (state 1). Whenever the application is stopped, even
partially, when a "blocking" error appears, when there are incorrect output voltages
or power disappears, the relay falls back and its associated contact opens (state 0).
Illustration:
PLC in RUN mode
PLC in STOP mode or
reporting a fault condition
Alarm relay
Operation
alarm relay
rack 0
appearance of a
PLC blocking error or
incorrect voltages
CAUTION
SUPPLY MODULE ALARM NOT FUNCTIONAL WITH PCX 57 PROCESSOR
When a PCX 57 processor, which can be integrated into a PC, is being used, the
supply module alarm relay is not managed and is therefore always open.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
If this function is absolutely imperative for the proper operation of the installation, the
alarm relay of the power supply module can be replaced by the use of an alarm relay
output on the bus X or the FIPIO bus. In order to achieve this, this output should be:
a relay output,
configured with fallback to 0 (default configuration),
z initialized at state 1 when the application program starts executing.
z
z
When configured in this way, the relay output will behave in the same way as the
alarm relay controlled by a TSX P57 processor.
35011052.06 07/2008
377
TSX PSY … supply modules : auxiliary functions
Alarm relay for
modules on the
other racks (1 to
7)
Once the module has been switched on and if the output voltages are correct, the
alarm relay is activated and the contact is closed (state 1).
If the power disappears, or if the output voltages are incorrect, the relay falls back
(state 0).
These modes of operation allow these contacts to be used in fail-safe external
circuits, as, for example, the automatic control of pre-actuator supplies, or the
transmission of information.
378
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY … supply modules : auxiliary functions
Characteristics of the alarm relay contact
Characteristics
Relay alarm contact.
Voltage limit when in
use
Alternating current
19..0.264 V
Direct current (possible up to 34V for 1hr in every 24hrs)
10...30 V
Thermal current
3A
Alternating current
load
Resistive load AC
12
Voltage
~24V
~48V
Power
50VAC (5)
50VAC (6) 110VAC (6) 220VAC (6)
110VAC (4) 220VAC (4)
Inductive AC14
and AC15
Voltage
~24V
~48V
Power
24VAC (4)
10VAC (10) 10VAC (11) 10VAC (11)
24VAC (8) 50VAC (7) 50VAC (9)
110VAC (2) 110VAC (6)
220VAC (1)
Resistive DC12
Voltage
24V (direct)
Power
24 W (6)
40 W (3)
Voltage
24V (direct)
Power
10 W (8)
24 W (6)
Minimum switchable load
1mA/5V
Direct current load
Inductive load
DC13
(L/R=60ms)
Response time
Activation
< 10 ms
Deactivation
< 10 ms
~110V
~110V
~220V
~220V
Type of contact
Normally open
Built-in protection
Against overloading and short
circuits
None, a fast-blow fuse must be fitted
Against inductive over-voltage
in ~
None, compulsory installation – in parallel to the terminals
of each pre-actuator - of a RC circuit or MOV (ZNO) peak
limiter, appropriate to the voltage in use
Against direct current inductive
over-voltage
None, a discharge diode must be fitted to the terminals of
each pre-actuator.
Insulation (test
voltage)
Contact/ground
2000 V rms-50/60Hz-1mn (on modules TSX PSY 2600/5500/1610/
3610/5520)
3000 V rms-50/60Hz-1mn (on module TSX PSY 8500)
Resistance of
insulation
> 10 MΩ under 500 VDC
(1) 0.1 x 76 operations
35011052.06 07/2008
(7) 1.5 x 106 operations
379
TSX PSY … supply modules : auxiliary functions
(2) 0.15 x 86 operations
(8) 2 x 106 operations
(3) 0.3 x 96 operations
(9) 3 x 106 operations
(4) 0.5 x 106 operations
(10) 5 x 106 operations
(5) 0.7 x 106 operations
(11) 10 x 106 operations
(6) 1 x 106 operations
380
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY power supply modules:
breakdown of power consumption
and power
43
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
The aim of this Chapter is to provide a breakdown of power consumption and power
for the selection of the power supply module.
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
35011052.06 07/2008
Topic
Page
Breakdown of power consumption for selection of the power supply module
382
Processor consumption breakdown
384
I/O module consumption breakdown
385
Consumption breakdown of analog/counting/movement control modules
387
Consumption breakdown of communication modules
388
Consumption breakdown (other modules)
390
381
TSX PSY power supply modules: breakdown of power consumption and power
Breakdown of power consumption for selection of the power supply module
General points
The power needed to supply a rack depends on the type of modules installed on it.
It is therefore necessary to perform a consumption report in order to define the
supply module to be mounted on the rack (standard or double format module).
Reminder of the
outputs available
with each power
supply module
Summary table:
Standard format
Double format
TSX PSY
1610
TSX PSY
2600
TSX PSY
3610
TSX PSY
5520
TSX PSY
5500
TSX PSY 8500
Total output (all outputs
included)(1) (4b)
30 W
(30 W)
26W
(30 W)
50 W
(55) W
50 W
(55 W)
50 W
(55 W)
77W at 60°C
85W at 55°C, 100W with
a TSX FAN
Power available on 5 VDC
output (1 b)
15 W
25 W
35 W
35 W
35 W
75 W
Power available on 24 VR
output (2 b)
15 W
15 W
19 W
19 W
19 W
not supplied
Power available on 24VDC
output (sensors supply on
the front panel terminal block)
(3 b)
not
supplied
12 W
not
supplied
not
supplied
19 W
38 W
(1) The values in brackets correspond to the maximum values which can be
supported for 1 minute every 10 minutes. These values should not be taken into
account when calculating the breakdown of power consumption.
WARNING
POWER CONSUMPTION LIMITS
When the power consumption needs are established, the total power consumed
on each output (5 VDC, 24 VR and 24 VS) must not exceed the total output of the
module.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.
382
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY power supply modules: breakdown of power consumption
Note: The TSX PSY 8500 supply module does not have a 24 VR output for
supplying some modules at 24VDC. Therefore, the following provisions and
preparations must be made for all racks which have this type of power supply:
z the relay output modules TSX DSY 08R . / 16R. and the weighing module TSX
ISP Y 100 cannot be installed on these racks,
z the TSX ASY 800 analog output modules should be configured using an
external power supply (maximum of 3 modules per rack).
Breakdown of
power
Table of power breakdown:
Rack number:
1
Power required at 5VDC output:
.........x10-3Ax5V
=................W
2
Power required at 24VR output:
.........x10-3Ax24V
=................W
3
Power required at 24VS output:
.........x10-3Ax24V
=................W
4
Total power required:
=................W
WARNING
CALCULATED POWER CONSUMPTION VS. CAPACITY
The calculated power consumption from above must not exceed the power of the
supply modules in the table below.
z power required on each output – available power on each output: 1-1a, 2-2a, 33a.
z sum of the power required on each output – total power available: 4-4a.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.
35011052.06 07/2008
383
TSX PSY power supply modules: breakdown of power consumption and power
Processor consumption breakdown
Table 1
This table shows the typical consumption of each module and can be used to
calculate the consumption per rack and on each output depending on the modules
installed:
Rack number:
Module type
Product references
No.
Consumption in mA (typical value) (1)
At 5VDC
Module
Processor + PCMCIA
memory card
TSX P57 103
440
TSX P57 153
530
TSX P57 203
750
TSX P57 2623
1110
TSX P57 253/353LA
820
TSX P57 2823
1180
TSX P57 303/303A
1000
TSX P57 3623/3623A
1360
TSX P57 353/353A
1060
TSX P57 453/453A
1080
TSX P57 4823/4823A
1440
At 24VR
Total
Module
At 24VS (2)
Total
Module
Total
Total
(1) Module consumption is given for 100% of inputs or outputs in state 1.
(2) If using a 24V (direct) external sensor supply, the consumption on this output
should not be taken into account when selecting the power supply for the rack.
Note: If the CPU is intended to replace an ATRIUM module in your PLC
configuration, make sure that the surplus electrical consumption on the rack which
is caused by this modification does not lead to the replacement of your power
supply module by a more powerful module.
384
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY power supply modules: breakdown of power consumption
I/O module consumption breakdown
Table 2
This table shows the typical consumption of each module and can be used to
calculate the consumption per rack and on each output depending on the modules
installed:
Rack number:
Module type
Product references
No.
Consumption in mA (typical value) (1)
At 5VDC
Module
At 24VR
Total
Module
At 24VS (2)
Total
Module
Total
Carried forward
Discrete input
TOR outputs
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX DEY 08D2
55
TSX DEY 16A2
80
TSX DEY 16A3
80
TSX DEY 16A4
80
80
TSX DEY 16A5
80
TSX DEY 16D2
80
135
TSX DEY 16D3
80
135
TSX DEY 16FK
250
75
TSX DEY 32D2K
135
160
TSX DEY 32D3K
140
275
TSX DEY 64D2K
155
TSX DSY 08R4D
55
315
80
TSX DSY 08R5
55
70
TSX DSY 08R5A
55
80
TSX DSY 08S5
125
TSX DSY 08T2
55
TSX DSY 08T22
55
TSX DSY 08T31
55
TSX DSY 16R5
80
TSX DSY 16S4
220
TSX DSY 16S5
220
TSX DSY 16T2
80
TSX DSY 16T3
80
TSX DSY 32T2K
140
TSX DSY 64T2K
155
135
385
TSX PSY power supply modules: breakdown of power consumption and power
Rack number:
Discrete Inputs/
Outputs
TSX DMY 28FK
300
75
TSX DMY 28RFK
300
75
Total
(1) Module consumption is given for 100% of inputs or outputs in state 1.
(2) If using a 24V (direct) external sensor supply, the consumption on this output
should not be taken into account when selecting the power supply for the rack.
386
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY power supply modules: breakdown of power consumption
Consumption breakdown of analog/counting/movement control modules
Table 3
This table shows the typical consumption of each module and can be used to calculate the
consumption per rack and on each output depending on the modules installed:
Rack number:
Module type
Product references
No.
Consumption in mA (typical value) (1)
At 5VDC
Module
At 24VR
Total
Module
At 24VS (2)
Total
Module
Total
Carried forward
Analog
Counting
Axis control
Step by step control
TSX AEY 414
660
TSX AEY 420
500
TSX AEY 800
270
TSX AEY 810
475
TSX AEY 1600
270
TSX AEY 1614
300
TSX AEY 410
990
TSX AEY 800 (3)
200
TSX CTY 2A
280
30
TSX CTY 2C
850
15
TSX CTY 4A
330
36
TSX CAY 21
1100
15
TSX CAY 22
1100
15
TSX CAY 33
1500
30
TSX CAY 41
1500
30
TSX CAY 42
1500
30
300
TSX CSY 84
1800
TSX CFY 11
510
50
TSX CFY 21
650
100
Grand total
(1) Module consumption is given for 100% of inputs or outputs in state 1.
(2) If using a 24V (direct) external sensor supply, the consumption on this output
should not be taken into account when selecting the power supply for the rack.
(3) If using a 24VR (direct) external power supply, the consumption of 300mA on the
internal 24VR should not be taken into account when selecting the rack power
supply.
35011052.06 07/2008
387
TSX PSY power supply modules: breakdown of power consumption and power
Consumption breakdown of communication modules
Table 4
This table shows the typical consumption of each module and can be used to
calculate the consumption per rack and on each output depending on the modules
installed:
Rack number:
Module type
Product references
No.
Consumption in mA (typical value) (1)
At 5VDC
Module
At 24VR
Total
Module
At 24VS (2)
Total
Module
Total
Carried forward
Communication TSX ETY 110 (3)
(4)
800
TSX ETY 120 (3)
(4)
800
TSX ETY 210 (3)
(4)
800
1200
1200
1200
TSX ETY 4102/5102
360
TSX IBY 100
500
TSX PBY 100
400
TSX SAY 100
110
TSX SAY 1000
100
TSX SCY 21601
350
TSX SCP 111
140
TSX SCP 112
120
TSX SCP 114
150
TSX FPP 10
330
TSX FPP 200
330
TSX JNP 112
120
TSX JNP 114
150
TSX MBP 100
220
TSX MDM 10
195
Grand total
(1) Module consumption is given for 100% of inputs or outputs in state 1,
388
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY power supply modules: breakdown of power consumption
(2) if using a 24V (direct) external sensor power supply, the consumption on this
output should not be taken into account when selecting the power supply for the
rack,
(3) without remote power feed (RJ45),
(4) with remote power feed (AUI).
35011052.06 07/2008
389
TSX PSY power supply modules: breakdown of power consumption and power
Consumption breakdown (other modules)
Table 5
This table shows the typical consumption of each module and can be used to
calculate the consumption per rack and on each output depending on the modules
installed:
Rack number:
Module type
Product references
No.
Consumption in mA (typical value) (1)
At 5VDC
Module
At 24VR
Total
Module
At 24VS (2)
Total
Module
Total
Carried forward
Weighing
TSX ISPY 100/101
150
Emergency stop
backup
TSX PAY 262
150
TSX PAY 282
150
Remote bus X
TSX REY 200
500
Other (devices
TSX P ACC01
without their own
T FTX 117 (adjust)
power supply which
can be connected to
the terminal port)
145
150
310
Grand total
(1) Module consumption is given for 100% of inputs or outputs in state 1,
(2) If using a 24V (direct) external sensor power supply, the consumption on this
output should not be taken into account when selecting the power supply for the
rack.
390
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY 2600 power supply
module
44
Characteristics of the TSX PSY 2600 power supply module
Characteristics
The TSX PSY 2600 module is a single format alternating current power supply
module.
Reference
TSX PSY 2600
Primary
Nominal voltage (V) ~
100...240
Voltage limits (V) ~
85...264
Nominal and limit frequencies
50-60/47-63Hz
Apparent power
50 VA
Nominal current consumption: Irms
≤ 0.5A to 100V
≤ 0.3A to 240V
Initial power-up at 25°C (1)
I
signal
≤ 37A to 100V
≤ 75A to 240V
I 2t
on locking
0.63A2s to 100V
It
on locking
0.034 As at 100V
0.067 As at 240V
Accepted length of micro-power outages
Integrated phase protection
35011052.06 07/2008
2.6A2s to 240V
≤10ms
via internal, non-accessible fuse
391
TSX PSY 2600 power supply module
Reference
TSX PSY 2600
Secondary
Total output
5VDC output
24VR output (24V relay) (2)
24VS output (24V sensor)
Protection of output from
26W
Nominal voltage:
5.1V
Nominal current
5A
Power (typical)
25W
Nominal voltage:
24VDC
Nominal current
0.6A
Power (typical)
15W
Nominal voltage:
24VDC
Nominal current
0.5A
Power (typical)
12W
overloading/short circuits/over-voltages
Power dissipation
10W
Auxiliary functions
Alarm relay
yes (1 contact closed, free from potential on terminal block)
Display
yes, via LED on front panel
Back-up
battery
yes (status monitored via LED on front panel of module)
Conformity to IEC 1131-2
the norms
Insulation
Dielectric resistance (50/60Hz1mn)
Primary/secondary
2000 Vrms
Primary/ground
2000 Vrms
24VDC output/ground Resistance of insulation
Primary/secondary
≥ 100 MΩ
Primary/ground
≥ 100 MΩ
(1) These values should be taken into account when starting up several devices at
the same time, or for dimensioning the protection systems.
(2) 24V direct current output for supplying relays of "relay output" modules.
392
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY 5500 power supply
module
45
Characteristics of the TSX PSY 5500 power supply module
Characteristics
The TSX PSY 5500 module is a double format alternating current power supply
module.
Reference
Primary
Nominal voltage (V) ~
100..120/
200..240
Voltage limits (V) ~
85..140/190..264
Nominal and limit frequencies
50-60/47-63Hz
Apparent power
150 VA
Nominal current consumption: Irms
≤ 1.7A to 100V
≤ 0.5A to 240V
Initial power-up at 25°C (1)
I
signal
≤ 38A to 100V
≤ 38A to 240V
I 2t
on locking
4A2s to 100V
It
on locking
0.11 As at 100V
0.11 As at 240V
Accepted length of micro-power outages
Integrated phase protection
35011052.06 07/2008
2A2s to 240V
≤10ms
via internal, non-accessible fuse
393
TSX PSY 5500 power supply module
Reference
Secondary
Total output
5VDC output
24VR output (24V relay) (2)
24VS output (24V sensor)
Protection of output from
50W
Nominal voltage:
5.1V
Nominal current
7A
Power (typical)
35W
Nominal voltage:
24VCC
Nominal current
0.8A
Power (typical)
19W
Nominal voltage:
24VCC
Nominal current
0.8A
Power (typical)
19W
overloading/short circuits/over-voltages
Power dissipation
20W
Auxiliary functions
Alarm relay
yes (1 contact closed, free from potential on terminal block)
Display
yes, via LED on front panel
Back-up
battery
yes (status monitored via LED on front panel of module)
Conformity to IEC 1131-2
the norms
Insulation
Dielectric resistance (50/60Hz1mn)
Primary/secondary
2000 Vrms
Primary/ground
2000 Vrms
24VDC output/ground Resistance of insulation
Primary/secondary
≥ 100 MΩ
Primary/ground
≥ 100 MΩ
(1) These values should be taken into account when starting up several devices at
the same time, or for dimensioning the protection systems.
(2) 24V direct current output for supplying relays of "relay output" modules.
394
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY 8500 power supply
module
46
Characteristics of the TSX PSY 8500 power supply module
Characteristics
The TSX PSY 8500 module is a double format alternating current power supply
module.
Reference
Primary
Nominal voltage (V) ~
100..120/
200..240
Voltage limits (V) ~
85..140/170..264
Nominal and limit frequencies
50-60/47-63Hz
Apparent power
150 VA
Nominal current consumption: Irms
≤ 1.4A to 100V
≤ 0.5A to 240V
Initial power-up at 25°C (1)
I
signal
≤ 30A to 100V
≤ 60A to 240V
I 2t
on locking
15A2s to 100V
8A2s to 240V
It
on locking
0.15 As at 100V
0.15 As at 240V
Accepted length of micro-power outages
≤10ms
Integrated phase protection via internal, non-accessible fuse
35011052.06 07/2008
395
TSX PSY 8500 power supply module
Reference
Secondary
Total output
5VDC output
77/85/100W (2)
Nominal voltage:
5.1V
Nominal current
15A
Power (typical)
75W
24VR output (24V relay) (3) Nominal voltage:
24VS output (24V sensor)
Protection of output from
not supplied
Nominal current
not supplied
Power (typical)
not supplied
Nominal voltage:
24VDC
Nominal current
1.6A
Power (typical)
38W
overloading/short circuits/over-voltages
Power dissipation
20W
Auxiliary functions
Alarm relay
yes (1 contact closed, free from potential on terminal block)
Display
yes, via LED on front panel
Back-up battery
yes (status monitored via LED on front panel of module)
Conformity to the
norms
IEC 1131-2
Insulation
Dielectric resistance (50/
60Hz-1mn)
Resistance of insulation
Primary/secondary
3000 Vrms
Primary/ground
3000 Vrms
24VDC output/
ground
500 Vrms
Primary/secondary
≥ 100 MΩ
Primary/ground
≥ 100 MΩ
(3) 24V direct current output for supplying relays of "relay output" modules.
396
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY 1610 power supply
module
47
Characteristics of the TSX PSY 1610 power supply module
Characteristics
The TSX PSY 1610 module is a single format non-isolated direct current power
supply module.
Reference
Primary
TSX PSY 1610
Nominal voltage (not isolated)
24 VDC
Voltage limits (including ripple) (1) (possible up to 34V
for 1hr in every 24hrs)
19.2 to 30 VDC
Nominal input current: Irms at 24VDC
≤1.5 A
Initial power-up at 25°C (2)
I
signal
≤ 100A at 24V DC
I2t
on locking
12.5 A2s
It
on locking
0.2 As
Accepted length of micro-power outages
Integrated input protection
35011052.06 07/2008
≤1ms
via 5x20 time delay fuse, 3.5A
397
TSX PSY 1610 power supply module
Reference
TSX PSY 1610
Secondary
Total output (typical)
5VDC output
30 W
Nominal voltage:
5V
Nominal current
3A
Power (typical)
15W
24VR output (24VDC relay) (3) Nominal voltage:
Built-in output protection
against (4)
U network – 0.6V
Nominal current
0.6 A
Power (typical)
15 W
Overloading
yes
Short circuits
yes
Over-voltage
Power dissipation
yes
10W
Auxiliary functions
Alarm relay
yes (1 contact closed, free from potential on terminal block)
Display
yes, via LED on front panel
Back-up
battery
yes (status monitored via LED on front panel of module)
Conformity to the norms
IEC1131-2
(1) With the supply of "relay output" modules, the limit range is reduced to
21.6V26.4V.
(2) These values should be taken into account when starting up several devices at
the same time, and for dimensioning the protection systems.
(3) 24V direct current output for supplying relays of "relay output" modules.
(4) The 24VR output voltage, which cannot be accessed by the user, is protected by
a fuse which is located under the module (5x20, 4A, Medium type).
398
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY 3610 power supply
module
48
Characteristics of the TSX PSY 3610 power supply module
Characteristics
The TSX PSY 3610 module is a double format non-insulated direct current supply
module.
Reference
Primary
Nominal voltage
24 VDC
Voltage limits (including ripple) (1) (possible up to 34V
for 1hr in every 24hrs)
19.2 to 30 VDC
Nominal input current: Irms at 24VDC
≤2.7 A
Initial power-up at 25°C (2)
I
signal
≤ 150A at 24V DC
I2t
on locking
20 A2s
It
on locking
0.5 As
Accepted length of micro-power outages
Integrated input protection
35011052.06 07/2008
≤1ms
no
399
TSX PSY 3610 power supply module
Reference
Secondary
Total output (typical)
5VDC output
24VR output (24V relay) (3)
Built-in output protection
against
(4)
50 W
Nominal voltage:
5.1V
Nominal current
7A
Power (typical)
35W
Nominal voltage:
U network – 0.6V
Nominal current
0.8 A
Power (typical)
19 W
Overloading
yes
Short circuits
yes
Over-voltage
yes
Power dissipation
15W
Auxiliary functions
Alarm relay
yes (1 contact closed, free from potential on terminal block)
Display
yes, via LED on front panel
Back-up
battery
yes (status monitored via LED on front panel of module)
Conformity to the norms
IEC1131-2
(1) With the supply of "relay output" modules, the limit range is reduced to
21.6V26.4V.
(2) These values should be taken into account when starting up several devices at
the same time, and for dimensioning the protection systems.
(3) 24V direct current output for supplying relays of "relay output" modules.
(4) The 24VR output voltage, which cannot be accessed by the user, is protected by
a fuse which is located under the module (5x20, 4A, Medium type).
400
35011052.06 07/2008
TSX PSY 5520 power supply
module
49
Characteristics of the TSX PSY 5520 power supply module
Characteristics
The TSX PSY 5520 module is a double format insulated direct current power supply
module.
Reference
Primary
Nominal voltage
24..0.48 VDC
Voltage limits (including ripple)
19.2 to 60VDC
Nominal input current: Irms
≤ 3 A at 24V DC
≤ 1.5A at 48V DC
Initial power-up at 25°C (1)
I
signal
≤ 15A at 24V DC
≤ 15 A at 48V DC
I 2t
on locking
50 A2s at 24VDC
It
on locking
7 As at 24VDC
6 As at 48VDC
Accepted length of micro-power outages
Built-in protection of + input
35011052.06 07/2008
55 A2s at 48VDC
≤1ms
by internal, non-accessible fuse module
401
TSX PSY 5520 power supply module
Reference
Secondary
Total output (typical)
5VDC output
24VR output (24VDC relay) (2)
50 W
Nominal voltage:
5.1V
Nominal current
7A
Power (typical)
35W
Nominal voltage:
24 V
Nominal current
0.8 A
Power (typical)
19 W
Built-in output protection against Overloading
yes
Short circuits
yes
Over-voltage
Power dissipation
yes
20W
Auxiliary functions
Alarm relay
yes (1 contact closed, free from potential on terminal block)
Display
yes, via LED on front panel
Back-up
battery
yes (status monitored via LED on front panel of module)
Conformity to the norms
Insulation
Dielectric resistance
IEC1131-2
primary/secondary
primary/ground
Resistance of insulation
primary/secondary
primary/ground
2000 Vrms-50/
60Hz-1mn
2000 Vrms-50/
60Hz-1mn
≥ 10 MΩ
≥ 10 MΩ
(1) These values should be taken into account when starting up several devices at
the same time, and for dimensioning the protection systems.
(2) 24VDC output for supplying the relays of the "relay output" modules.
402
35011052.06 07/2008
Process and AS-i supply
VI
At a Glance
Aim of this Part
This Part describes Process and AS-i supply and their installation.
What's in this
Part?
This part contains the following chapters:
35011052.06 07/2008
Chapter
Chapter Name
Page
50
Process and AS-i supply: introduction
405
51
Process and AS-i suppliers: installation
419
52
Process supply modules: connections
431
53
Connecting AS-i supply modules
439
54
Process and AS-i supply module characteristics
449
403
Process and AS-i supply
404
35011052.06 07/2008
Process and AS-i supply:
introduction
50
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
This Chapter introduces Process and AS-i supply.
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
35011052.06 07/2008
Topic
Page
General introduction to Process and AS-i power supply modules
406
Physical description of TBX SUP 10 supply block
407
Physical description of the TSX SUP 1011 supply module
408
Physical description of TSX 1021/1051 supply modules
409
Physical description of the TSX SUP A02 supply module
411
Description of TSX SUP 1101/A05 supply blocks
412
Physical description of the support board
413
Process supply: auxiliary functions
415
AS-i supply module: dedicated features
417
405
Process and AS-i supply: introduction
General introduction to Process and AS-i power supply modules
General
A wide range of power supply units and modules is offered to meet your needs in
the best possible way:
TBX SUP 10 and TSX SUP 1..1 process power supply units and modules,
designed to supply 24 VDC to a PLC system periphery, and driven by PLCs
(TSX Micro and Premium). This periphery being composed of sensors, preactuators, encoders, operator dialog terminals, regulators, LEDs, push-buttons,
pneumatic actuators, etc. . This 24 V power supply can be delivered using a
100/240 V, 50/60 Hz AC network.
The power supply modules TBX SUP 10 and TSX SUP 1011 can also be
connected to a 125 VDC network.
z The AS-i power supply units and modules TSX SUP A02 and A05 designed to
supply 30 VDC to the components connected to an AS-i field bus. This power
supply is distributed over the same wires as those used for data exchange.
z
The attachment mode for these products has been specially designed to respond to
the specific mounting distances and specifications of TSX Micro and TSX Premium
PLCs, and TBX products.
All the products are mounted:
z
z
406
on a Telequick AM1-PA mounting plate,
on a central DIN rail AM1-DP200/DE200, except for the high-power power supply
blocks TSX SUP 1101 and TSX SUP A05.
35011052.06 07/2008
Process and AS-i supply: introduction
Physical description of TBX SUP 10 supply block
Illustration
Diagram and numbers:
1
2
3
4
Number table
The following table shows the numbers and their corresponding descriptions from
the diagram above:
Numbers
35011052.06 07/2008
Description
1
LED showing power-up of module.
2
Screw terminal block for supply voltage wiring.
3
Identification label for the wire terminals.
4
Wings for fixing the module.
407
Process and AS-i supply: introduction
Physical description of the TSX SUP 1011 supply module
Illustration
Diagram and numbers:
Number table
The following table shows the numbers and their corresponding descriptions from
the diagram above:
Numbers Description
1
2
Support board for fixing the supply module directly onto the AM1-DE200 / DP200
DIN mounting track or the AM1-PA Telequick perforated board.
Display block with:
z a 24 V LED (green): lit if the established internal and output voltages are correct,
z a LSH LED (orange) "power optimization mode": lit if the power supply is
running in parallelization mode with power optimization.
3
4
Flap for protecting the terminal block.
Screw terminal block for connection:
z to the AC/DC supply network,
z to 24 VDC output.
5
Hole for the cable-tightening clip to go through.
6
"NOR/LSH" switch placed at the back of the module to control the power
optimization system.
z NOR position: normal operation without power optimization (default position),
z LSH position: operation with power optimization with supply running in
parallel.
Note: Access to the switch requires the module to be removed from the support
board.
408
35011052.06 07/2008
Process and AS-i supply: introduction
Physical description of TSX 1021/1051 supply modules
Illustration
Diagram and numbers:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
35011052.06 07/2008
409
Process and AS-i supply: introduction
Number table
The following table shows the numbers and their corresponding descriptions from
the diagram above:
Numbers
1
2
Description
Support board for fixing the supply module directly onto the AM1-DE200 /
DP200 DIN mounting track or the AM1-PA Telequick perforated board.
Display block with:
z a 24 V LED (green): lit if the internal and output voltages are correct,
z a LSH LED (orange) only on TSX SUP 1021 "power optimization mode":
lit if the power supply is running in parallelization mode with power
optimization.
3
4
Flap for protecting the terminal block.
Screw terminal block for connection:
z to the AC/DC supply network,
z to 24 VDC output.
5
Hole for the cable-tightening clip to go through.
6
110/220 V voltage selector. On delivery, the selector is set at 220.
7
"NOR/LSH" switch placed at the back of the module to control the power
optimization system. This switch is only present on the TSX SUP 1021
module.
z NOR position: normal operation without power optimization (default
position),
z LSH position: operation with power optimization with supply running in
parallel.
Note: Access to the switch requires the module to be removed from the
support board.
410
35011052.06 07/2008
Process and AS-i supply: introduction
Physical description of the TSX SUP A02 supply module
Illustration
Diagram and numbers:
Number table
The following table shows the numbers and their corresponding descriptions from
the diagram above:
Numbers
35011052.06 07/2008
Description
1
Support board for mounting the supply module directly onto the AM1-DE200 /
DP200 DIN mounting rail or the AM1-PA Telequick board.
2
Display block with:
z an AS-i LED (green): lit if the internal and output voltages are correct,
3
Flap for protecting the terminal block.
4
Screw terminal block for connection:
z to an alternating supply network,
z from AS-i 30 VDC output.
5
Hole for the cable-tightening clip to go through.
6
110/220 V voltage selector. On delivery, the selector is set at 220.
411
Process and AS-i supply: introduction
Description of TSX SUP 1101/A05 supply blocks
Illustration
Diagram and numbers:
Number table
The following table shows the numbers and their corresponding descriptions from
the diagram above:
Numbers
412
Description
1
Display block with an ON LED (orange): lit if power supply is running.
2
Display block with:
z a 24 V LED (green): lit if 24 VDC output voltage is present and correct,
z an AS-i LED (green): lit if the AS-i 30 VDC output voltage is present and
correct. This LED is only present on the TSX SUP A05.
3
Flap for protecting terminal blocks.
4
Screw terminal block for connection to alternating supply network.
5
Screw terminal block for connecting AS-i 24 VDC and 30 VDC output voltage
to TSX SUP A05.
6
Holes for the cable-tightening clip to go through.
7
Four mounting holes for M6 screws.
35011052.06 07/2008
Process and AS-i supply: introduction
Physical description of the support board
Introduction
Each TSX SUP 10.1 and TSX SUP A02 supply module is delivered mounted on a
support board. This is used to fix the supply module: the DIN AM1-DE200 or AM1DP200 profile, or to a Telequick AM1-PA perforated mounting plate.
Each support board can take: either a TSX SUP 1021, TSX SUP 1051 or TSX SUP
A02 module, or one or two TSX SUP 1011 modules.
Illustration
35011052.06 07/2008
Diagram and numbers:
413
Process and AS-i supply: introduction
Information
Table
The following table shows the numbers and their corresponding descriptions from
the diagram above:
Number
Description
1
Three 5.5 mm diameter holes for mounting the board onto a panel or an AM1PA perforated board with a mounting distance of 140 mm (mounting distance
for TSX 37 PLCs).
2
Four 6.5 mm diameter holes for mounting the board onto a panel or an AM1PA perforated board with a mounting distance of 88.9 mm (mounting distance
for TSX 57 PLCs).
3
Two M4 holes for mounting TSX SUP 1011/1021/1051/A02 supply module(s).
4
Windows designed to ink pins situated at the bottom and at the back of the
module.
Note:
• each of these supply modules can also be mounted on a TSX RKY••• rack in place
of another module, except in position PS. This must only be used by a TSX PSY•••
supply module for supplying rack modules.
• the following operations require the module to be removed from the support
board:
- positioning the "NOR/LSH" switch onto "LSH",
- mounting the board onto a panel or AM1-PA perforated board,
- mounting the module onto a TSX RKY••• rack.
414
35011052.06 07/2008
Process and AS-i supply: introduction
Process supply: auxiliary functions
Parallelization
mode with power
optimization
The aim of parallelization is to use two modules with the same product reference
in order to provide an output current which is greater than the maximum allowed by
a single supply. The total current is the sum of the currents provided by all the
supplies put together.
Power optimization is a system within the supply which is designed to distribute
currents equally between parallel supplies. The resulting advantage is that the life of
products is significantly extended, linked with distributed power consumption.
Dedicated supply features:
TSX SUP 1011/1021 Power optimization mode is obtained by positioning the NOR/LSH
supply
switch at the rear of the modules onto LSH. To access the switch, the
support board must be removed. When the orange LED (LSH) is lit,
the mode is in operation.
The current provided by two parallel supplies is limited to:
z 2A with 2 TSX SUP 1011 suppliers,
z 4A with 2 TSX SUP 1021 suppliers.
Using this mode means output voltage can vary slightly: 24V + or - 5%
instead 24 V + or - 3% in normal mode.
When sharing loads, the power imbalance can reach a maximum of
25%.
A specific connection (see Connection of TSX SUP 1011/1021 power
supplies, p. 432) is required for these types of modules.
TSX SUP 1051/1101 Power optimization mode does not require a switch on these supply
supply
modules. A specific connection must be made for the TSX SUP 1051
(see Connection of TSX SUP 1051 power supplies, p. 434) module
and the TSX SUP 1101 (see Connection of TSX SUP 1101 power
supplies, p. 436) module.
The maximum current provided by two parallel supplies is limited to:
z 10A with 2 TSX SUP 1051 suppliers,
z 20A with 2 TSX SUP 1101 suppliers.
Using this mode will lead to no loss of output voltage:
When sharing loads, the power imbalance can reach a maximum of
15%.
35011052.06 07/2008
415
Process and AS-i supply: introduction
Redundancy on
TSX SUP 1011/
1021 power
supplies
Principle:
To provide the currents required for the application, even in the event of loss of one
of the power supplies.
To do this, the two suppliers are run in parallel by setting up the necessary
connections (see Connection of TSX SUP 1011/1021 power supplies, p. 432).
The suppliers are configured in power optimization mode.
Example: provide 1A with redundancy from 2 TSX SUP 1011 suppliers.
Fuse
Discrete inputs 1 and 2 on the PLC
indicate the loss of one or other of the
power supplies.
Load
Note: TSX SUP 1051 and 1101 suppliers are not equipped with a serial diode,
which is required for the redundancy function.
416
35011052.06 07/2008
Process and AS-i supply: introduction
AS-i supply module: dedicated features
General
The simultaneous transmission of information and power down the same cable
means that data transmission needs to be filtered in relation to supply.
This is why AS-i supply module has a built-in decoupling filter which supports the
maximum direct current provided by the power supply. A standardized impedance
is introduced into the power supply in relation to the frequency of information
transmission.
35011052.06 07/2008
417
Process and AS-i supply: introduction
418
35011052.06 07/2008
Process and AS-i suppliers:
installation
51
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
This Chapter deals with the installation of Process and AS-i supply modules.
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
35011052.06 07/2008
Topic
Page
TBX SUP 10 dimensions/mounting/connections
420
Dimensions/mounting Process and AS-i supply modules
422
TSX SUP 1101/A05 supply block dimensions/mounting
427
Summary of mounting methods
429
419
Process and AS-i suppliers: installation
TBX SUP 10 dimensions/mounting/connections
Dimensions/
mounting
Illustration:
The TBX SUP 10 supply block must be mounted in an upright position to allow for
the best possible natural air convection within the block.
It can be mounted on a panel, an AM1-PA Telequick perforated board or AM1DE200 / DP200 mounting rail.
420
35011052.06 07/2008
Process and AS-i suppliers: installation
Connections
Illustration:
(1) External protection fuse on phase: 1A time delay 250V if single supply block.
Note: Primary: if the module is supplied with a 100/240V alternating current, the
phase and the neutral wire must be taken into account when wiring. On the other
hand, if the module is supplied with a 125 V direct current, polarities do not need
to be taken into account.
Secondary: the terminal, with 0V potential, must be connected to the ground as
soon as the supply module starts to provide output.
DANGER
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE
The module ground terminal must be connected to the protective ground with a
green/yellow wire.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
35011052.06 07/2008
421
Process and AS-i suppliers: installation
Dimensions/mounting Process and AS-i supply modules
At a Glance
Each power supply module is delivered with a support which allows it to be mounted
directly on a DIN (AM1-D••••) mounting rail or TELEQUICK (AM1-PA) mounting
plate.
The support is able to receive:
z
z
1 or 2 TSX SUP 1011 power supply modules,
1 TSX SUP 1021/1051/A02 power supply module.
Note: When using the TELEQUICK mounting plate, it is necessary to remove the
module.
1 module
TSX SUP 1011
422
2 modules
TSX SUP 1011
1 module
TSX SUP 1021/
1051/A02
35011052.06 07/2008
Process and AS-i suppliers: installation
Dimensions
The illustration below shows the dimensions of the modules and support and the
overall dimensions for each type of mounting system.
SUP 1011
SUP 1021/
1051/A02
Mounting support
Dimensions in millimeters
TSX SUP 1011/1021/1051/A02 power supply modules can be mounted in different
ways:
Mounting on an AM1-DE200 or AM1-DP200 mounting rail or on an AM1-PA
board
Each supply module is delivered fixed to a support which can be mounted in this
way.
35011052.06 07/2008
423
Process and AS-i suppliers: installation
Mounting on an
AM1-D mounting
rail
(1) 147.2mm (AM1-DE200)
139.7mm (AM1-DP200)
Carry out the following steps:
Step
424
Action
1
Remove the module from its support.
2
Mount the support, using 3 M6x25 screws, onto the AM1-D••• mounting rails
equipped with AF1-CF56 1/4 turn sliding nuts.
3
Mount the module on its support.
35011052.06 07/2008
Process and AS-i suppliers: installation
Mounting on an
AM1-PA board
(2) 136.7 mm (AM1-PA)
Carry out the following steps:
Step
Removing the
module
Action
1
Remove the module from its support.
2
Mount the support onto the AM1-PA board.
3
Mount the module on its support.
Carry out the following steps:
Step
Action
1
Loosen the screw on the upper part of the module in order to separate it from
the support.
2
Rotate the module in order to free the lower pins from the support.
Illustration:
Support
Support
35011052.06 07/2008
425
Process and AS-i suppliers: installation
Mounting on an
AM1-ED•••
mounting rail
Mounting on a
TSX RKY••• rack
Carry out the following steps:
Step
Action
1
Remove the module from its support.
2
Mount the support, using 3 M6x25 screws, onto the AM1-ED••• mounting rails
equipped with AF1-CF56 1/4 turn sliding nuts.
3
Mount the module on its support.
TSX SUP 1011/1021/1051/A02 power supply modules can be mounted in any
position on the TSX RKY•• rack, except for the PS position reserved for the power
supply module of the rack. In this case, the support is not used and must be
removed.
The support delivered with the supply module is not used and must be removed; the
module is in this case mounted in the same way as the other modules (e.g.:
processor (see How to mount processor modules, p. 161).
Note: The power supply module of the TSX PSY••• rack must be in the PS position
in order to supply power to the modules in the rack.
426
35011052.06 07/2008
Process and AS-i suppliers: installation
TSX SUP 1101/A05 supply block dimensions/mounting
Introduction
TSX SUP 1101 and TSX SUP A05 supply blocks can be mounted on a panel, an
AM1-PA board, or DIN rail.
Mounting on a
panel
Screw-hole layout (dimensions in millimeters):
4 mounting holes (1)
(1) The diameter of the mounting holes must be sufficient to take M6 screws.
Mounting on an
AM1-PA
Telequick
mounting grid
35011052.06 07/2008
Fix the supply block with 4 M6 x 25 screws + washers and AF1-EA6 clips nuts
(dimensions in millimeters):
427
Process and AS-i suppliers: installation
Mounting on 35
mm wide DIN
mounting rail
428
Fix the supply block using 4 M6 x 25 screws + washers and AF1-CF6 1/4 turn sliding
nuts (dimensions in millimeters):
35011052.06 07/2008
Process and AS-i suppliers: installation
Summary of mounting methods
Summary table
of mounting
methods
The following table lists a summary of the different methods available for mounting
Process and AS-i supply modules:
Supply module product
reference
TBX SUP
10
TSX SUP
1011
TSX SUP
1021
TSX SUP
1051
TSX SUP
1101
TSX SUP
A02
TSX SUP
A05
AM1-PA Telequick board
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
AM1-DE200/DP200 central
DIN rail
X
X
X
X
AM1-ED DIN rail with 88.9
mm spacing (TSX 57 PLC)
X
X
X
TSX 57 rack
TSX RKY••
X
X
X
35011052.06 07/2008
X
X
X
X
X
429
Process and AS-i suppliers: installation
430
35011052.06 07/2008
Process supply modules:
connections
52
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
This Chapter deals with the connection of Process supply modules.
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
35011052.06 07/2008
Topic
Page
Connection of TSX SUP 1011/1021 power supplies
432
Connection of TSX SUP 1051 power supplies
434
Connection of TSX SUP 1101 power supplies
436
431
Process and AS-i supply modules: connections
Connection of TSX SUP 1011/1021 power supplies
Illustration
Connection diagram:
Parallelization
Normal connection
Module 1
Module 2
Fu=External fuse
on phase (Fu): 250 V 4 A time delay.
(1) 100...240 VAC on TSX SUP 1011
100...120/200..240 VAC on TSX SUP 1021
(2) 125 VDC, only on TSX SUP 1011.
432
35011052.06 07/2008
Process and AS-i supply modules: connections
Connection rules
Primary:if the module is supplied with a 100/240 VAC power supply, it is necessary
to observe wiring requirements for the phase and neutral when connecting the
module. However, if the module is powered by a 125 VDC supply, it is not necessary
to respect the polarities.
z
an operating voltage ≥ 600 VAC with a cross-section of 1.5 mm2 (14 AWG) for
connection to the mains,
DANGER
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE
The ground terminal of the module must be connected to the protective earth using
a green/yellow wire.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
The power supply terminal is protected by a flap which allows access to the wiring
terminals. The wires come vertically out of the power supply at its base. These wires
can be kept in place with a cable-clip.
Secondary: to comply with isolation requirements (EN 60950) for a 24 V SELV
isolated voltage, the following wiring is used:
z
35011052.06 07/2008
an operating voltage ≥ 300 VAC with a cross-section of 2.5 mm2 (12 AWG) for
the 24 V outputs and the ground.
433
Process and AS-i supply modules: connections
Connection of TSX SUP 1051 power supplies
Illustration
Connection diagram:
Normal connection
Parallelization
Module 1
Fu=External safety fuse on phase
(Fu): 250 V 4 A time delay
434
Module 2
35011052.06 07/2008
Process and AS-i supply modules: connections
Connection rules
Primary: observe the rules concerning phase and neutral when wiring.
z
an operating voltage ≥ 600 VAC with a cross-section of 1.5 mm2 (14 AWG) for
connection to the mains,
DANGER
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE
The ground terminal of the module must be connected to the protective earth using
a green/yellow wire.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
The power supply terminal is protected by a flap which allows access to the wiring
terminals. The wires come vertically out of the power supply at its base. These wires
can be kept in place with a cable-clip.
Secondary: to comply with isolation requirements (EN 60950) for a 24 V SELV
isolated voltage, the following wiring is used:
z
35011052.06 07/2008
an operating voltage ≥ 300 VAC with a cross-section of 2.5 mm2 (12 AWG) for
the 24 V outputs and the ground.
435
Process and AS-i supply modules: connections
Connection of TSX SUP 1101 power supplies
Illustration 1
Normal connection diagram:
output terminal
input terminal
AC network
connection
200..240 V
436
AC network
connection
100..120 V
24 VDC output
connection.
35011052.06 07/2008
Process and AS-i supply modules: connections
Illustration 2
Parallel connection diagram (parallelization):
input terminals
output terminals
Module 1
Module 2
(1) Connection for a 100...120 VAC power supply.
(2) External fuse on phase (Fu): 250 V 6.3 A time delay.
35011052.06 07/2008
437
Process and AS-i supply modules: connections
Connection rules
Primary: Observe the rules concerning phase and neutral when wiring.
z
an operating voltage ≥ 600 VAC with a cross-section of 1.5 mm2 (14 AWG) or
2.5 mm2 (12 AWG) for connection to the mains,
DANGER
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE
The ground terminal of the module must be connected to the protective earth using
a green/yellow wire.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
The power supply terminal is protected by a flap which allows access to the wiring
terminals. The wires come vertically out of the power supply at its base. These wires
can be kept in place with a cable-clip.
Secondary: To comply with isolation requirements (EN 60950) for a 24 V SELV
isolated voltage, the following wiring is used:
an operating voltage ≥ 300 VAC with a cross-section of 2.5 mm2 (12 AWG) for
the 24 V outputs and the ground.
z Wire the two 24 V terminals in parallel, or distribute the load over the two 24 V
outputs when the total current to be supplied is greater than 5 A.
z
438
35011052.06 07/2008
Connecting AS-i supply modules
53
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
This Chapter deals with the connection of AS-i supply modules.
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
35011052.06 07/2008
Topic
Page
Connection of TSX SUP A02 power supply modules
440
Connecting TSX SUP A05 supply modules
442
General precautions
446
439
Connecting AS-i supply modules
Connection of TSX SUP A02 power supply modules
Illustration
Connection diagram:
(1) Shielded AS-i cable
screen if environment is
disturbed.
Fu=External fuse on phase
(Fu): 250 V 4 A time delay.
Connection
synoptic
The TSX SUP A02 power supply module is designed to supply the AS-i bus, and the
connected slaves (30 VDC/2.4 A).
AS-i Master
440
35011052.06 07/2008
Connecting AS-i supply modules
Connection rules
Primary: observe the rules concerning phase and neutral when wiring.
DANGER
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE
The ground terminal of the module must be connected to the protective earth using
a green/yellow wire.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
The power supply terminal is protected by a flap which allows access to the wiring
terminals. The wires come vertically out of the power supply at its base. These wires
can be kept in place with a cable-clip.
To comply with isolation requirements (EN 60950) for a 24 V SELV isolated voltage,
the following wiring is used:
an operating voltage ≥ 600 VAC with a cross-section of 1.5 mm2 (14 AWG) for
connection to the mains,
2
z an operating voltage ≥ 300 VAC with a cross-section of 2.5 mm (12 AWG) for
the 24 V outputs and the ground.
z
It is necessary to use a shielded cable for the AS-i bus only in cases where the
installation is subject to very high levels of disturbance in terms of EMC (Electro
Magnetic Compatibility).
35011052.06 07/2008
441
Connecting AS-i supply modules
Connecting TSX SUP A05 supply modules
Illustration
Connection diagram:
Input terminal
Output terminal
(1)
(3)
Connection to
alternating network
200...240 V
Connection to an
alternating network
100...120 V
Direct output connection 24 V
and 30 V AS-i
(1) Connection if supply is from 100...120 V alternating current network.
(2) External protection fuse on phase (Fu): 6.3 A time delay 250 V.
(3) Shielded AS-i cable screen in case of disrupted surroundings.
442
35011052.06 07/2008
Connecting AS-i supply modules
Connection
overview
The TSX SUP A05 supply module is designed to supply the AS-i bus, including the
slaves which are connected to it (30 V/5 A output). It also has an auxiliary supply
(24 VDC/7 A) for sensors/actuators which consume large amounts of current. For
this, a black AS-i ribbon cable is used.
Principle diagram:
AS-i master
35011052.06 07/2008
443
Connecting AS-i supply modules
Rules of
connection
Primary: observe the rules concerning phase and neutral when wiring.
z
an operating voltage ≥ 600 VAC with a cross-section of 1.5 mm2 (14 AWG) or
2.5 mm2 (12 AWG) for connection to the mains,
DANGER
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE
The module ground terminal must be connected to the protective ground with a
green/yellow wire.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
The "AC power supply network" and "24 V and 30 VDC output" AS-i terminals are
protected by a flap allowing access to the wiring terminals. The wires come vertically
out of the power supply at its base. These wires can be kept in place with a cableclip.
Secondary: to comply with isolation requirements (EN 60950) for a 24 V SELV
isolated voltage, the following wiring is used:
an operating voltage ≥ 300 VAC with a cross-section of 2.5 mm2 (12 AWG) for
the 24 V outputs and the ground,
z connect the two 24 V terminals in parallel, or distribute the load over the two 24 V
outputs when the total current to be provided is greater than 5 A.
z
Using a shielded cable for the AS-i bus is only necessary if the installation is overly
disrupted in terms of EMC (Electro Magnetic Compatibility).
Given the large current that this supply module provides, its position on the bus is
very important.
If the supply module is placed at one of the ends of the bus, it will provide a nominal
current (e.g. 5 A) for the whole bus. The voltage drop at the end of the bus is
therefore proportional to the 5 A.
If it is positioned in the middle of the bus, the voltage drop at the ends is proportional
to only 2.5 A, assuming that the consumption for both sections of the bus is the
same.
444
35011052.06 07/2008
Connecting AS-i supply modules
Supply
AS-i
2.5 A
2.5 A
If there is no slave which consumes large amounts of power, it would be better to
place the supply module in the middle of the installation. Conversely, if the
installation has one or several large power consumers, it would be wise to place the
supply module close to them.
Note: Where there are large power consumer actuators (contactor, solenoid coils
etc.) the TSX SUP A05 supply module can provide the auxiliary 24 VDC, insulated
from the AS-i line.
35011052.06 07/2008
445
Connecting AS-i supply modules
General precautions
Introduction
While installing the yellow AS-i cable, it is essential to place it in a cable track which
is separate from the power cables. It is also advisable to place it flat and not twisted.
This will help make the two AS-i cable wires as symmetrical as possible.
Installing the AS-i cable on a surface connected to the electric potential of the
machine (for example, the housing) complies with the requirements of the EMC
(Electro Magnetic Compatibility) directive.
The end of the cable, or the ends in the case of a bus with a star-formation , must
be protected either:
z
z
by connecting it (them) to a T-derivation,
by not allowing them to come out of their last connection point.
Important
It is important to distribute power effectively on the AS-i bus, so that each device on
the bus is supplied with sufficient voltage to enable it to operate properly. To do this,
certain rules must be followed.
Rule 1
Select the capacity of the supply module adapted to the total consumption of the ASi segment. Available capacities are 2.4 A (TSX SUP A02) and 5 A (TSX SUP A05).
A capacity of 2.4 A is generally sufficient based on an average consumption of
65mA per slave for a segment made up of a maximum of 31 slaves.
446
35011052.06 07/2008
Connecting AS-i supply modules
Rule 2
To minimize the effect of voltage drops and reduce the cost of the cable, you must
determine the best position of the supply module on the bus, as well as the minimum
size of cable appropriate for distributing power.
The voltage drop between the master and the last slave on the bus must not exceed
3 V. For that purpose, the table below gives the essential points for selecting the
cross-sectional measurement of the AS-i cable.
Table of characteristics:
Cross-section
0.75 mm2 (28 AWG) 1.5 mm2 (14 AWG) 2.5 mm2
measurement of AS-i cable
(12 AWG)
Linear resistance
52 milli Ohms/meter
27 milli Ohms/
meter
16 milli Ohms/
meter
Voltage drop for 1 A over
100 meters (328 feet)
5.2 V
2.7 V
1.6 V
The cable which can be used for most applications is the cable with a cross-section
of 1.5 mm2 (14 AWG). This is the standard AS-i bus model (the cable is offered in
the SCHNEIDER catalog).
Smaller cables can be used when sensors consume very little power.
Note: The maximum length of all the segments making up the AS-i bus without a
relay is 100 meters (328 feet). The lengths of cables which link a slave to a passive
distribution box must be taken into account.
35011052.06 07/2008
447
Connecting AS-i supply modules
448
35011052.06 07/2008
Process and AS-i supply module
characteristics
54
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
This Chapter presents the different electrical characteristics of Process and AS-i
supply modules in a table.
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
35011052.06 07/2008
Topic
Page
Electrical characteristics of process supply modules: TBX SUP 10 and TSX
SUP 1011
450
Electrical characteristics of process supply modules: TSX SUP 1021/1051/
1101
452
Electrical characteristics of AS-i supply modules: TSX SUP A02/A05
454
Physical environmental characteristics
457
449
Process and AS-i supply module characteristics
Electrical characteristics of process supply modules: TBX SUP 10 and TSX SUP
1011
Table of
Characteristics
The following table describes the electrical characteristics of supply modules: TBX
SUP 10 and TSX SUP 1011:
Process supply
TBX SUP 10 24V/1A
TSX SUP 1011 24V/
1A
Primary
Nominal input voltage
V
alternating 100240
direct 125
alternating 100240
direct 125
Input limit voltage
V
alternating 90264
direct 88156
alternating 85264
direct 105156
Network frequency
Hz
47...63
47...63/360...440
Nominal input current (U=100V)
On
0.4
0.4
Maximum call
current (1)
to 100 V
On
3
37
to 240 V
On
30
75
Maximum It on
trigger (1)
to 100 V
As
0.03
0.034
to 240 V
As
0.07
0.067
to 100 V
2
A s
2
0.63
to 240 V
A 2s
2
2.6
Power factor
0.6
0.6
Harmonic (3)
10% (Phi=0°and 180°) 10% (Phi=0°and
180°)
2
Maximum I t on
trigger (1)
Full load efficiency
%
>75
>75
Output (2)
W
24
26(30)
Nominal output
current (2)
On
1
1.1
Secondary
450
35011052.06 07/2008
Process and AS-i supply module characteristics
Process supply
TBX SUP 10 24V/1A
TSX SUP 1011 24V/
1A
Output voltage/
accuracy at 25°C
V
24+/-5%
24+/-3%
Residual ripple (peak to peak)
Maximum HF noise (peak to peak)
mV
240
150
mV
240
240
ms
≤10 in AC
≤1 in DC
≤10 in AC
≤1 in DC
continuous automatic
reset
fallback to 0 and
automatic reset after
fault has
disappeared
cuts off at U>36
cuts off at U>36
Parallelization
no
yes with power
optimization
Serialization
no
yes
Power dissipation
8
18
Accepted length of micro-power
outages (3)
Protection against
Short circuits
and
overloads
Overvoltages
V
(1) Values on initial power-up at 25°C. These elements are to be taken into account
on start-up for the dimensioning of protection devices.
(2) Output power and current for an ambient temperature of 60°C. Input value in ( )
= output in a ventilated cabinet or within a temperature range of 0+40°C.
(3) A nominal voltage for a repetition period of 1Hz.
35011052.06 07/2008
451
Process and AS-i supply module characteristics
Electrical characteristics of process supply modules: TSX SUP 1021/1051/1101
Table of
Characteristics
The following table describes the electrical characteristics of supply modules: TSX
SUP 1021/1051/1101:
Process supply
TSX SUP 1021 24V/2A TSX SUP 1051
24V/5A
TSX SUP 1101
24V/10A
Primary
Nominal input voltage
V
alternating 100..0.120/200..0.240
Input limit voltage
V
alternating 85...132/170...264
Network frequency
Hz
47...63/360...440
Nominal input current (U=100V)
On
0.8
Maximum call current (1)
Maximum It on trigger (1)
2.4
5
to 100 V
On
<30
51
75
to 240 V
On
<30
51
51
to 100 V
As
0.06
0.17
0.17
to 240 V
As
0.03
0.17
0.17
to 100 V
A 2s
4
8.6
8.5
to 240 V
2s
4
8.6
8.5
Power factor
0.6
0.52
0.5
Harmonic 3
10% (ϕ=0° and 180°)
Maximum I2t on trigger (1)
Full load efficiency
A
%
>75
>80
Secondary
Output (2)
W
53(60)
120
240
Nominal output current (2)
On
2.2
5
10
Residual ripple (peak to peak)
mV
150
Maximum HF noise (peak to peak) mV
Output voltage (0°C-60°c) V
24+/-3%
mV
240
Accepted length of micro-power outages (3) ms
<=10
Start-up time on resisting load
<1
452
s
24+/-1%
200
35011052.06 07/2008
Process and AS-i supply module characteristics
Process supply
Protection against
TSX SUP 1021 24V/2A TSX SUP 1051
24V/5A
Short circuits
and
overloads
Overvoltages
V
fallback to 0 and
automatic reset after
fault has disappeared
current limit
cuts off at U>36
cuts off at U>32
Parallelization
yes with power optimization
Serialization
yes
Power dissipation
18
30
TSX SUP 1101
24V/10A
60
(1) Values on initial power-up at 25°C. These elements are to be taken into account
on start-up for the dimensioning of protection devices.
(2) Output power and current for an ambient temperature of 60°C. Input value in ( )
= output in a ventilated cabinet or within a temperature range of 0+40°C.
(3) A nominal voltage for a repetition period of 1Hz.
35011052.06 07/2008
453
Process and AS-i supply module characteristics
Electrical characteristics of AS-i supply modules: TSX SUP A02/A05
Table of
Characteristics
The following table describes the electrical characteristics of supply modules: TSX
SUP A02/A05:
References
TSX SUP A02
30V AS-i / 2.4A
TSX SUP A05 24V/7 AS-i & 30V AS-i/5A
Primary
Nominal input voltage
V
alternating 100..0.120/
200..0.240
alternating 100..0.120/200..0.240
Input limit voltage
V
alternating 85...132/
170...264
alternating 85...132/170...264
Network frequency
Hz
47...63/360...440
47...63/360...440
Nominal input current (U=100V)
On
1.3
5
Maximum call
current (1)
to 100 V
On
30
50
to 240 V
On
30
50
to 100 V
As
0.06
0.17
Maximum It on
trigger (1)
2
Maximum I t on
trigger (1)
to 240 V
As
0.03
0.17
to 100 V
2
A s
4
8.5
to 240 V
A 2s
4
8.5
0.6
0.51
Power factor
Harmonic 3
10% (Phi=0°and 180°)
10% (Phi=0°and 180°)
%
>75
>80
W
72(84)
(2)
230 (3)
30 V AS-i
output
On
2.4(2.8) (2)
5 (3)(4)
24 V output
On
-
7 (3)(4)
Full load efficiency
Secondary
Output
Peak nominal
current
454
35011052.06 07/2008
Process and AS-i supply module characteristics
References
TSX SUP A02
30V AS-i / 2.4A
TSX SUP A05 24V/7 AS-i & 30V AS-i/5A
Output voltage
Global variation (-10°C to +60°C)
V
V
30(AS-i)
29.5 to 31.6
24
+/-3%
30(AS-i)
29.5 to 31.6
Ripple (from 10 to 500 kHz)
mV
50
200
50
300
Ripple (from 0 to 10 kHz)
mV
300
240
Start-up time on resisting load
s
<2 (where C=15000
micro Farads
<2 (where C= 15000 micro Farads)
Length of micro power outages (5)
ms
≤10
Protection against
Short circuits
and
overloads
Overvoltages
Power dissipation
fallback to 0 and
automatic reset after
fault has disappeared
current limit on each output
V
cuts off at U>36
cuts off at U>36
W
24
60
(1) Values on initial power-up at 25°C. These elements are to be taken into account
on start-up for the dimensioning of protection devices.
(2) Output and output current for an ambient temperature of 60°C. Input value () =
surge output.
(3) Output and output current for a maximum ambient temperature of 55°C, if
product index II = 01 (60°C if product index II > 01).
(4) distribution of current for each output (see Chart of available currents on 30 V
AS-i and 24 V output from the TSX SUP A05 supply block., p. 456).
(5) Acceptable period at nominal voltage for a repetition period of 1 Hz.
35011052.06 07/2008
455
Process and AS-i supply module characteristics
Chart of available
currents on 30 V
AS-i and 24 V
output from the
TSX SUP A05
supply block.
456
The maximum power which can be delivered by the supply block is 230 W. If
consumption is 5 A on the 30 V AS-i, possible flow on 24 V output is no greater than
3 A (see chart below).
Chart:
35011052.06 07/2008
Process and AS-i supply module characteristics
Physical environmental characteristics
Table of
characteristics
The following table describes the electrical characteristics of Process and AS-i
supply modules:
Process and AS-i
supply blocks/
modules
TBX SUP 10
Connection to screw
terminals
1 terminal per output 1011/1021/1051/A02: 1 output
terminal
1101 : 2 terminals/output
A05: 2 terminals/output (24 VDC)
1 x 2.5 (12 AWG)
1 terminal/output (30 VDC AS-i)
2 x 1.5 (14 AWG) with adapter or 1
x 2.5 (12 AWG)
maximum capacity per
terminal
mm2
Temperature:
Storage
Operating
°C
°C
Relative humidity
%
5-95
Cooling
%
By natural convection
Reference standard
35011052.06 07/2008
-25 to +70
+5 to +55
-
Dielectric strength:
Primary/secondary
Primary/ground
Secondary/ground
V eff
V eff
V eff
50/60 Hz-1 mm
1500
1500
500
Insulation resistance
Primary/secondary
Primary/ground
MΩ
MΩ
≥ 100
≥ 100
TSX SUP 1011/1021
TSX SUP 1051/1101
TSX SUP A02/A05
-25 to +70
0 to +60 (TSX SUP 1011/1021/
1051/1101
-10 to +60 (TSX SUP A02/A05) (1)
Very Low Voltage Safety
(EN 60950 and IEC 1131-2)
3500
2200
500
Leakage current
I≤=3.5 mA (EN 60950)
Electrostatic uploading
immunity
6 kV per contact/8 KV in the air
(complies with IEC 1000-4-2)
Fast electric surge
2 kV (serial mode and common mode on input and output)
Electromagnetic field
influence
10 V/m (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
Rejected
electromagnetic
disturbances
(comply with FCC 15-A et EN 55022 class A
Test conditions: nominal U and I, resisting load,
cable: 1 meter horizontally, 0.8 meters vertically
457
Process and AS-i supply module characteristics
Process and AS-i
supply blocks/
modules
TBX SUP 10
Shock wave
Input: 4 kV MC, 2 kV MS Outputs: 2 kV MF, 0.5 kV MS
(complies with IEC 1000-4-5)
Vibration (2)
1 mm 3 Hz to 13.2 Hz 1g 57 Hz to 150 Hz (2g
TSX SUP A02/A05)
(complies with IEC 68-2-6, FC test)
Degree of protection
IP 20.5
MTBF at 40°C
Length of life at 50°C
TSX SUP 1011/1021
TSX SUP 1051/1101
TSX SUP A02/A05
IP 20.5, terminal IP 21.5
H
100 000
H
30 000 (at nominal voltage and 80 % of nominal power)
(1) -10°C +55°C for TSX SUP A05 supply module with product index II=01.
-10°C +60°C for TSX SUP A05 supply module with product index II > 01.
(2) complies with IEC 68-2-6, FC test with module or block mounted on a board or
panel.
458
35011052.06 07/2008
B
AC
Index
Addressing two racks at the same address,
93
agency approvals, 55
Alarm relay, 376
323
Characteristics of AS-i supply modules, 454
compliance, 55
Configuring the PCX 57 processor address,
302
Configuring the processor’s address, 304
B
D
A
Battery
PCMCIA Card, 189
battery for PCMCIA cards
lifetime, 193
Blocking errors, 208
Building a PCX 57 PLC station with a TSX
RKY rack, 89
Building a TSX P57 PLC station with TSX
RKY racks, 86
Bus X extension module
diagnostics, 140
installation, 129
Bus X extension modules
connections, 138
C
Changing the battery on the TSX P57, 182
Changing the PCMCIA Card Battery on the
TSX P57, 185
Changing the PCMCIA TSX MRP DS 2048 P
Card Battery on the TSX P57, 187
Changing the PCX 57 battery, 320
Changing the PCX 57 PCMCIA card battery,
35011052 06 07/2008
Description of PCX 57 processors, 288
Description of the support board, 413
Description of the TSX SUP A02 supply
module, 411
Description of TSX SUP 1101/A05 supply
blocks, 412
diagnosing power supplies, 368
diagnostics for CPU modules, 177
Premium, 177
diagnostics for power supplies, 367
Dimensions of PCX 57 processor cards, 291
E
Environment characteristics of AS-i supply
modules, 457
Event response time, 282
F
FAST cycle time, 281
Finding errors using the processor state
LEDs, 205
459
Index
fusing, 365
G
General characteristics of the PCX 57 203
processor, 329
General characteristics of the PCX 57 353
processor, 331
General introduction to PCX 57 processors,
26
General introduction to Process and AS-i
power supply modules, 406
General introduction to Process and AS-i
TSX SUP and TSX 1021/1051 power supply
modules, 29
General introduction to the AS-i bus interface
module
TSX SAY, 43
General Introduction to the TSX P57, 148
General introduction to the TSX PAY
emergency stop monitoring module, 46
General introduction to the TSX REY bus X
extension module, 31
General introduction to TSX CFY step by
step control modules, 37
General introduction to TSX DEY/DSY/DMY
input/output modules, 32
General Introduction to TSX P57
Processors, 24
General introduction to TSX RKY racks, 27
General introduction to TSX SCY/ETY
communication, 38
grounding
racks, 84
installing CPUs
Premium, 99
installing power supplies, 347
installing process power supplies, 431
installing racks, 77
Installing the PCX 57
preliminary operations, 301
Installing the PCX 57 processor, 297
Integrating a PCX 57 into an bus X section,
310
Introduction to PCX 57 processors, 286
Introduction to TSX CAY axis control
modules, 35
L
Logical installation of the PCX 57 processor
on the bus X, 298
M
MAST cycle time, 273, 275, 279
Memory Card TSX MRP DS 2048 P, 174
Memory Card TSX MRP F 004M, 174
Memory Cards, 168, 171
memory cards, 157
Module addresses, 94
Module installation on a rack, 96
Mounting/Removing a PCMCIA Card on
TSX P57, 164
N
Non blocking errors, 206
H
O
How the PCX 57 behaves after an action on
the PC, 326
Overview of a PLC station, 21
Overview of aPLC station, 20
I
P
Installation/mounting TSX PSY supply
modules, 348
Installing a PCX 57 in the PC, 308
installing batteries, 177
PCMCIA cards, 157
PCX 57 card components, 292
performance, 271
460
35011052 06 07/2008
Index
Physical Description of TSX P57
Processors, 150
PLC station rack addressing, 91
PLC station topology, extension module, 142
Positioning of line termination, 107
Positioning of the processor module, 158
power consumption, 381
power supply modules, 339
Processing on insertion/extraction of a
PCMCIA memory card on a PCX 57 PLC,
314
Processing on Insertion/Extraction of a
PCMCIA Memory Card on a Premium PLC,
167
Processor/system errors, 209
processors
Premium, 145
R
Rack power supply failure, 372
racks
accessories, 99
Real-time clock, 153
T
topologies
racks, 85
TSX CBY..0K bus X extension cable, 100
TSX P 57 103 characteristics, 211
TSX P57 153 characteristics, 213
TSX P57 203 characteristics, 215
TSX P57 253 characteristics, 217
TSX P57 2623 characteristics, 219
TSX P57 2823 characteristics, 223
TSX P57 303 characteristics, 227
TSX P57 303A characteristics, 229
TSX P57 353 characteristics, 233
TSX P57 353A characteristics, 235
TSX P57 353LA characteristics, 239
TSX P57 3623 characteristics, 243
TSX P57 3623A characteristics, 247
TSX P57 453 characteristics, 251
TSX P57 453A characteristics, 253
TSX P57 4823 characteristics, 257
35011052 06 07/2008
TSX P57 4823A characteristics, 261
TSX P57 Electrical Characteristics, 266
TSX SUP 10 dimensions/mounting/
connection, 420
TSXCBY..0K, 99
TSXCBY1000, 99
TSXFAN, 113
TSXH5724M, 145
TSXH5744M, 145
TSXP53204, 145
TSXP57/TSXH57, 145
TSXP570244, 145
TSXP57104, 145
TSXP57154, 145
TSXP571634, 145
TSXP57254, 145
TSXP572634, 145
TSXP57304, 145
TSXP57354, 145
TSXP573634, 145
TSXP57454, 145
TSXP574634, 145
TSXP57554, 145
TSXP575634, 145
TSXP576634, 145
TSXPSY1610, 397
TSXPSY2600, 391
TSXPSY3610, 399
TSXPSY5500, 393
TSXPSY5520, 401
TSXREY200, 125
TSXRKA02, 108
TSXRKYxx, 65
TSXTLYEX, 105
V
VAC power systems, 362
VDC power systems, 362
Ventilation module
mounting, 118
ventilation modules, 113
Viewing on TSX P57, 178
461
Index
W
What happens after you press the processor
RESET button, 325
X
X-Bus extension modules, 125
462
35011052 06 07/2008
">